ChipFind - документация

Электронный компонент: C8051F300P

Скачать:  PDF   ZIP

Document Outline

DS004-2.2 APR 03
CYGNAL Integrated Products, Inc.
2003
Page 1
PRELIMINARY
Mixed-Signal ISP FLASH MCU Family
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
ANALOG PERIPHERALS
-
8-Bit ADC
Up to 500 ksps
Up to 8 External Inputs
Programmable Amplifier Gains of 4, 2, 1, & 0.5
VREF from External Pin or VDD
Built-in Temperature Sensor
External Conversion Start Input
-
Comparator
Programmable Hysteresis and Response Time
Configurable as Interrupt or Reset Source
Low Current (
< 0.5A)
ON-CHIP DEBUG
-
On-Chip Debug Circuitry Facilitates Full Speed,
Non-Intrusive In-System Debug (No Emulator
Required!)
-
Provides Breakpoints, Single Stepping, Inspect/Modify
Memory and Registers
-
Superior Performance to Emulation Systems Using
ICE-Chips, Target Pods, and Sockets
-
Complete Development Kit: $99
SUPPLY VOLTAGE 2.7V TO 3.6V
-
Typical Operating Current: 5mA @ 25 MHz;
11A @ 32 kHz
-
Typical Stop Mode Current: 0.1 A
-
Temperature Range: -40C to +85C
HIGH SPEED 8051 C Core
-
Pipe-lined Instruction Architecture; Executes 70% of
Instructions in 1 or 2 System Clocks
-
Up to 25 MIPS Throughput with 25 MHz Clock
-
Expanded Interrupt Handler
MEMORY
-
256 Bytes Internal Data RAM
-
8k Bytes FLASH; In-System Programmable in 512 byte
Sectors
DIGITAL PERIPHERALS
-
8 Port I/O; All 5 V tolerant with High Sink Current
-
Hardware Enhanced UART and SMBusTM Serial Ports
-
Three General Purpose 16-Bit Counter/Timers
-
16-Bit Programmable Counter Array (PCA) with Three
Capture/Compare Modules
-
Real Time Clock Mode using PCA or Timer and External
Clock Source
CLOCK SOURCES
-
Internal Oscillator: 24.5 MHz with 2% Accuracy Sup-
ports UART Operation
-
External Oscillator: Crystal, RC, C, or Clock (1 or 2 Pin
Modes)
-
Can Switch Between Clock Sources on-the-fly; Useful in
Power Saving Modes
11-PIN MICRO LEAD PACKAGE
-
3x3mm PWB Footprint; Actual MLP Size:
ANALOG
PERIPHERALS
8-bit
500ksps
ADC
PGA
8KB
ISP FLASH
256 B SRAM
POR
DEBUG
CIRCUITRY
12
INTERRUPTS
8051 CPU
(25MIPS)
TEMP
SENSOR
DIGITAL I/O
PROGRAMMABLE PRECISION INTERNAL
OSCILLATOR
HIGH-SPEED CONTROLLER CORE
A
M
U
X
I/
O
P
ort
CR
O
SSBAR
UART
SMBus
PCA
Timer 0
Timer 1
Timer 2
VOLTAGE
COMPARATOR
+
-
WDT
Page 2
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
Notes
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 3
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. SYSTEM OVERVIEW .........................................................................................................11
1.1. CIP-51TM Microcontroller Core ......................................................................................14
1.1.1. Fully 8051 Compatible ..........................................................................................14
1.1.2. Improved Throughput ............................................................................................14
1.1.3. Additional Features................................................................................................15
1.2. On-Chip Memory ............................................................................................................16
1.3. On-Chip Debug Circuitry ................................................................................................17
1.4. Programmable Digital I/O and Crossbar .........................................................................18
1.5. Serial Ports.......................................................................................................................18
1.6. Programmable Counter Array .........................................................................................19
1.7. 8-Bit Analog to Digital Converter (C8051F300/2 Only) ................................................20
1.8. Comparator ......................................................................................................................21
2. ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS ..................................................................................22
3. GLOBAL DC ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS ......................................................23
4. PINOUT AND PACKAGE DEFINITIONS........................................................................24
5. ADC0 (8-BIT ADC, C8051F300/2).......................................................................................31
5.1. Analog Multiplexer and PGA..........................................................................................32
5.2. Temperature Sensor.........................................................................................................33
5.3. Modes of Operation.........................................................................................................35
5.3.1. Starting a Conversion.............................................................................................35
5.3.2. Tracking Modes .....................................................................................................36
5.3.3. Settling Time Requirements ..................................................................................37
5.4. Programmable Window Detector ....................................................................................41
5.4.1. Window Detector In Single-Ended Mode .............................................................41
5.4.2. Window Detector In Differential Mode.................................................................42
6. VOLTAGE REFERENCE (C8051F300/2)..........................................................................45
7. COMPARATOR0 ..................................................................................................................47
8. CIP-51 MICROCONTROLLER..........................................................................................53
8.1. INSTRUCTION SET ......................................................................................................55
8.1.1. Instruction and CPU Timing..................................................................................55
8.1.2. MOVX Instruction and Program Memory.............................................................55
8.2. MEMORY ORGANIZATION........................................................................................59
8.2.1. Program Memory ...................................................................................................59
8.2.2. Data Memory .........................................................................................................60
8.2.3. General Purpose Registers .....................................................................................60
8.2.4. Bit Addressable Locations .....................................................................................60
8.2.5. Stack
...................................................................................................................61
8.2.6. Special Function Registers.....................................................................................61
8.2.7. Register Descriptions .............................................................................................64
8.3. Interrupt Handler .............................................................................................................67
8.3.1. MCU Interrupt Sources and Vectors .....................................................................67
8.3.2. External Interrupts .................................................................................................68
8.3.3. Interrupt Priorities..................................................................................................68
Page 4
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
8.3.4. Interrupt Latency....................................................................................................68
8.3.5. Interrupt Register Descriptions ..............................................................................70
8.4. Power Management Modes .............................................................................................75
8.4.1. Idle Mode ...............................................................................................................75
8.4.2. Stop Mode..............................................................................................................75
9. RESET SOURCES ................................................................................................................77
9.1. Power-On Reset...............................................................................................................78
9.2. Power-Fail Reset / VDD Monitor....................................................................................78
9.3. External Reset..................................................................................................................79
9.4. Missing Clock Detector Reset .........................................................................................79
9.5. Comparator0 Reset ..........................................................................................................79
9.6. PCA Watchdog Timer Reset ...........................................................................................79
9.7. FLASH Error Reset .........................................................................................................79
9.8. Software Reset.................................................................................................................80
10. FLASH MEMORY ................................................................................................................83
10.1. Programming The FLASH Memory ...............................................................................83
10.1.1. FLASH Lock and Key Functions ..........................................................................83
10.1.2. FLASH Erase Procedure........................................................................................83
10.1.3. FLASH Write Procedure .......................................................................................84
10.2. Non-volatile Data Storage ...............................................................................................85
10.3. Security Options ..............................................................................................................85
11. OSCILLATORS.....................................................................................................................89
11.1. Programmable Internal Oscillator ...................................................................................89
11.2. External Oscillator Drive Circuit.....................................................................................91
11.3. System Clock Selection...................................................................................................91
11.4. External Crystal Example................................................................................................93
11.5. External RC Example ......................................................................................................93
11.6. External Capacitor Example............................................................................................93
12. PORT INPUT/OUTPUT .......................................................................................................95
12.1. Priority Crossbar Decoder ...............................................................................................96
12.2. Port I/O Initialization.......................................................................................................98
12.3. General Purpose Port I/O...............................................................................................101
13. SMBUS..................................................................................................................................103
13.1. Supporting Documents ..................................................................................................104
13.2. SMBus Configuration....................................................................................................104
13.3. SMBus Operation ..........................................................................................................105
13.3.1. Arbitration............................................................................................................105
13.3.2. Clock Low Extension...........................................................................................106
13.3.3. SCL Low Timeout ...............................................................................................106
13.3.4. SCL High (SMBus Free) Timeout.......................................................................106
13.4. Using the SMBus...........................................................................................................107
13.4.1. SMBus Configuration Register............................................................................108
13.4.2. SMB0CN Control Register ..................................................................................111
13.4.3. Data Register........................................................................................................114
13.5. SMBus Transfer Modes.................................................................................................115
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 5
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
13.5.1. Master Transmitter Mode ....................................................................................115
13.5.2. Master Receiver Mode.........................................................................................116
13.5.3. Slave Receiver Mode ...........................................................................................117
13.5.4. Slave Transmitter Mode.......................................................................................118
13.6. SMBus Status Decoding................................................................................................119
14. UART0 ..................................................................................................................................123
14.1. Enhanced Baud Rate Generation...................................................................................124
14.2. Operational Modes ........................................................................................................125
14.2.1. 8-Bit UART .........................................................................................................125
14.2.2. 9-Bit UART .........................................................................................................126
14.3. Multiprocessor Communications...................................................................................127
15. TIMERS................................................................................................................................133
15.1. Timer 0 and Timer 1......................................................................................................133
15.1.1. Mode 0: 13-bit Counter/Timer.............................................................................133
15.1.2. Mode 1: 16-bit Counter/Timer.............................................................................134
15.1.3. Mode 2: 8-bit Counter/Timer with Auto-Reload .................................................135
15.1.4. Mode 3: Two 8-bit Counter/Timers (Timer 0 Only) ...........................................136
15.2. Timer 2
.......................................................................................................................141
15.2.1. 16-bit Timer with Auto-Reload ...........................................................................141
15.2.2. 8-bit Timers with Auto-Reload............................................................................142
16. PROGRAMMABLE COUNTER ARRAY .......................................................................145
16.1. PCA Counter/Timer.......................................................................................................146
16.2. Capture/Compare Modules............................................................................................147
16.2.1. Edge-triggered Capture Mode .............................................................................148
16.2.2. Software Timer (Compare) Mode........................................................................149
16.2.3. High Speed Output Mode ....................................................................................150
16.2.4. Frequency Output Mode ......................................................................................151
16.2.5. 8-Bit Pulse Width Modulator Mode ....................................................................152
16.2.6. 16-Bit Pulse Width Modulator Mode ..................................................................153
16.3. Watchdog Timer Mode..................................................................................................154
16.3.1. Watchdog Timer Operation .................................................................................154
16.3.2. Watchdog Timer Usage .......................................................................................155
16.4. Register Descriptions for PCA ......................................................................................156
17. C2 INTERFACE ..................................................................................................................161
17.1. C2 Interface Registers ...................................................................................................161
17.2. C2 Pin Sharing...............................................................................................................163
Page 6
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
Notes
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 7
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES
1. SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Table 1.1.
Product Selection Guide ......................................................................................12
Figure 1.1. C8051F300/2 Block Diagram..............................................................................12
Figure 1.2. C8051F301/3/4/5 Block Diagram .......................................................................13
Figure 1.3. Comparison of Peak MCU Execution Speeds.....................................................14
Figure 1.4. On-Chip Clock and Reset ....................................................................................15
Figure 1.5. On-chip Memory Map (C8051F300/1/2/3 shown)..............................................16
Figure 1.6. Development/In-System Debug Diagram ...........................................................17
Figure 1.7. Digital Crossbar Diagram....................................................................................18
Figure 1.8. PCA Block Diagram............................................................................................19
Figure 1.9. PCA Block Diagram............................................................................................19
Figure 1.10. 8-Bit ADC Block Diagram..................................................................................20
Figure 1.11. Comparator Block Diagram ................................................................................21
2. ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS
Table 2.1.
Absolute Maximum Ratings*..............................................................................22
3. GLOBAL DC ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Table 3.1.
Global DC Electrical Characteristics...................................................................23
4. PINOUT AND PACKAGE DEFINITIONS
Table 4.1.
Pin Definitions for the C8051F300/1/2/3/4/5......................................................24
Figure 4.1. MLP-11 Pinout Diagram (Top View) .................................................................25
Figure 4.2. MLP-11 Package Drawing ..................................................................................26
Table 4.2.
MLP-11 Package Diminsions..............................................................................26
Figure 4.3. Typical MLP-11 Solder Mask .............................................................................27
Figure 4.4. Typical MLP-11 Landing Diagram .....................................................................28
5. ADC0 (8-BIT ADC, C8051F300/2)
Figure 5.1. ADC0 Functional Block Diagram .......................................................................31
Figure 5.2. Typical Temperature Sensor Transfer Function..................................................33
Figure 5.3. Temperature Sensor Error with 1-Point Calibration (VREF = 2.40 V) ..............34
Figure 5.4. 8-Bit ADC Track and Conversion Example Timing...........................................36
Figure 5.5. ADC0 Equivalent Input Circuits .........................................................................37
Figure 5.6. AMX0SL: AMUX0 Channel Select Register (C8051F300/2)............................38
Figure 5.7. ADC0CF: ADC0 Configuration Register (C8051F300/2)..................................39
Figure 5.8. ADC0: ADC0 Data Word Register (C8051F300/2) ...........................................39
Figure 5.9. ADC0CN: ADC0 Control Register (C8051F300/2) ...........................................40
Figure 5.10. ADC Window Compare Examples, Single-Ended Mode ...................................41
Figure 5.11. ADC Window Compare Examples, Differential Mode ......................................42
Figure 5.12. ADC0GT: ADC0 Greater-Than Data Byte Register (C8051F300/2) .................43
Figure 5.13. ADC0LT: ADC0 Less-Than Data Byte Register (C8051F300/2) ......................43
Table 5.1.
ADC0 Electrical Characteristics..........................................................................44
6. VOLTAGE REFERENCE (C8051F300/2)
Figure 6.1. Voltage Reference Functional Block Diagram....................................................45
Figure 6.2. REF0CN: Reference Control Register ................................................................46
Table 6.1.
External Voltage Reference Circuit Electrical Characteristics ...........................46
Page 8
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
7. COMPARATOR0
Figure 7.1. Comparator0 Functional Block Diagram ............................................................47
Figure 7.2. Comparator Hysteresis Plot .................................................................................48
Figure 7.3. CPT0CN: Comparator0 Control Register ...........................................................49
Figure 7.4. CPT0MX: Comparator0 MUX Selection Register..............................................50
Figure 7.5. CPT0MD: Comparator0 Mode Selection Register..............................................51
Table 7.1.
Comparator0 Electrical Characteristics ...............................................................52
8. CIP-51 MICROCONTROLLER
Figure 8.1. CIP-51 Block Diagram ........................................................................................53
Table 8.1.
CIP-51 Instruction Set Summary.........................................................................55
Figure 8.2. Program Memory Maps.......................................................................................59
Figure 8.3. Data Memory Map ..............................................................................................60
Table 8.2.
Special Function Register (SFR) Memory Map..................................................62
Table 8.3.
Special Function Registers ..................................................................................62
Figure 8.4. DPL: Data Pointer Low Byte ..............................................................................64
Figure 8.5. DPH: Data Pointer High Byte .............................................................................64
Figure 8.6. SP: Stack Pointer .................................................................................................65
Figure 8.7. PSW: Program Status Word ................................................................................65
Figure 8.8. ACC: Accumulator..............................................................................................66
Figure 8.9. B: B Register .......................................................................................................66
Table 8.4.
Interrupt Summary...............................................................................................69
Figure 8.10. IE: Interrupt Enable .............................................................................................70
Figure 8.11. IP: Interrupt Priority ............................................................................................71
Figure 8.12. EIE1: Extended Interrupt Enable 1 .....................................................................72
Figure 8.13. EIP1: Extended Interrupt Priority 1.....................................................................73
Figure 8.14. IT01CF: INT0/INT1 Configuration Register ......................................................74
Figure 8.15. PCON: Power Control Register ..........................................................................76
9. RESET SOURCES
Figure 9.1. Reset Sources.......................................................................................................77
Figure 9.2. Power-On and VDD Monitor Reset Timing .......................................................78
Table 9.1.
User Code Space Address Limits ........................................................................79
Table 9.2.
Reset Electrical Characteristics ...........................................................................80
Figure 9.3. RSTSRC: Reset Source Register.........................................................................81
10. FLASH MEMORY
Table 10.1. FLASH Electrical Characteristics .......................................................................84
Table 10.2. Security Byte Decoding.......................................................................................85
Figure 10.1. FLASH Program Memory Map ..........................................................................85
Figure 10.2. PSCTL: Program Store R/W Control ..................................................................86
Figure 10.3. FLKEY: FLASH Lock and Key Register ...........................................................87
Figure 10.4. FLSCL: FLASH Scale Register ..........................................................................87
11. OSCILLATORS
Figure 11.1. Oscillator Diagram ..............................................................................................89
Figure 11.2. OSCICL: Internal Oscillator Calibration Register ..............................................90
Figure 11.3. OSCICN: Internal Oscillator Control Register ...................................................90
Table 11.1. Internal Oscillator Electrical Characteristics.......................................................91
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 9
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
Figure 11.4. OSCXCN: External Oscillator Control Register.................................................92
12. PORT INPUT/OUTPUT
Figure 12.1. Port I/O Functional Block Diagram ....................................................................95
Figure 12.2. Port I/O Cell Block Diagram...............................................................................95
Figure 12.3. Crossbar Priority Decoder with XBR0 = 0x00 ...................................................96
Figure 12.4. Crossbar Priority Decoder with XBR0 = 0x44 ...................................................97
Figure 12.5. XBR0: Port I/O Crossbar Register 0 ...................................................................99
Figure 12.6. XBR1: Port I/O Crossbar Register 1 ...................................................................99
Figure 12.7. XBR2: Port I/O Crossbar Register 2 .................................................................100
Figure 12.8. P0: Port0 Register..............................................................................................101
Figure 12.9. P0MDIN: Port0 Input Mode Register ...............................................................101
Figure 12.10. P0MDOUT: Port0 Output Mode Register.......................................................102
Table 12.1. Port I/O DC Electrical Characteristics ..............................................................102
13. SMBUS
Figure 13.1. SMBus Block Diagram .....................................................................................103
Figure 13.2. Typical SMBus Configuration ..........................................................................104
Figure 13.3. SMBus Transaction ...........................................................................................105
Table 13.1. SMBus Clock Source Selection.........................................................................108
Figure 13.4. Typical SMBus SCL Generation.......................................................................108
Table 13.2. Minimum SDA Setup and Hold Times .............................................................109
Figure 13.5. SMB0CF: SMBus Clock/Configuration Register .............................................110
Figure 13.6. SMB0CN: SMBus Control Register .................................................................112
Table 13.3. Sources for Hardware Changes to SMB0CN ....................................................113
Figure 13.7. SMB0DAT: SMBus Data Register ...................................................................114
Figure 13.8. Typical Master Transmitter Sequence...............................................................115
Figure 13.9. Typical Master Receiver Sequence ...................................................................116
Figure 13.10. Typical Slave Receiver Sequence ...................................................................117
Figure 13.11. Typical Slave Transmitter Sequence ...............................................................118
Table 13.4. SMBus Status Decoding....................................................................................119
14. UART0
Figure 14.1. UART0 Block Diagram.....................................................................................123
Figure 14.2. UART0 Baud Rate Logic ..................................................................................124
Figure 14.3. UART Interconnect Diagram ............................................................................125
Figure 14.4. 8-Bit UART Timing Diagram ...........................................................................125
Figure 14.5. 9-Bit UART Timing Diagram ...........................................................................126
Figure 14.6. UART Multi-Processor Mode Interconnect Diagram .......................................127
Figure 14.7. SCON0: Serial Port 0 Control Register.............................................................128
Figure 14.8. SBUF0: Serial (UART0) Port Data Buffer Register .........................................129
Table 14.1. Timer Settings for Standard Baud Rates Using The Internal Oscillator ...........130
Table 14.2. Timer Settings for Standard Baud Rates Using an External Oscillator.............130
Table 14.3. Timer Settings for Standard Baud Rates Using an External Oscillator.............131
Table 14.4. Timer Settings for Standard Baud Rates Using an External Oscillator.............131
Table 14.5. Timer Settings for Standard Baud Rates Using an External Oscillator.............132
Table 14.6. Timer Settings for Standard Baud Rates Using an External Oscillator.............132
15. TIMERS
Page 10
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
Figure 15.1. T0 Mode 0 Block Diagram................................................................................134
Figure 15.2. T0 Mode 2 Block Diagram................................................................................135
Figure 15.3. T0 Mode 3 Block Diagram................................................................................136
Figure 15.4. TCON: Timer Control Register.........................................................................137
Figure 15.5. TMOD: Timer Mode Register...........................................................................138
Figure 15.6. CKCON: Clock Control Register......................................................................139
Figure 15.7. TL0: Timer 0 Low Byte ....................................................................................140
Figure 15.8. TL1: Timer 1 Low Byte ....................................................................................140
Figure 15.9. TH0: Timer 0 High Byte ...................................................................................140
Figure 15.10. TH1: Timer 1 High Byte .................................................................................140
Figure 15.11. Timer 2 16-Bit Mode Block Diagram .............................................................141
Figure 15.12. Timer 2 8-Bit Mode Block Diagram ...............................................................142
Figure 15.13. TMR2CN: Timer 2 Control Register ..............................................................143
Figure 15.14. TMR2RLL: Timer 2 Reload Register Low Byte ............................................144
Figure 15.15. TMR2RLH: Timer 2 Reload Register High Byte ...........................................144
Figure 15.16. TMR2L: Timer 2 Low Byte ............................................................................144
Figure 15.17. TMR2H Timer 2 High Byte ............................................................................144
16. PROGRAMMABLE COUNTER ARRAY
Figure 16.1. PCA Block Diagram..........................................................................................145
Figure 16.2. PCA Counter/Timer Block Diagram .................................................................146
Table 16.1. PCA Timebase Input Options............................................................................146
Figure 16.3. PCA Interrupt Block Diagram...........................................................................147
Table 16.2. PCA0CPM Register Settings for PCA Capture/Compare Modules..................147
Figure 16.4. PCA Capture Mode Diagram ............................................................................148
Figure 16.5. PCA Software Timer Mode Diagram................................................................149
Figure 16.6. PCA High Speed Output Mode Diagram ..........................................................150
Figure 16.7. PCA Frequency Output Mode ...........................................................................151
Figure 16.8. PCA 8-Bit PWM Mode Diagram ......................................................................152
Figure 16.9. PCA 16-Bit PWM Mode ...................................................................................153
Figure 16.10. PCA Module 2 with Watchdog Timer Enabled ..............................................154
Table 16.3. Watchdog Timer Timeout Intervals ................................................................155
Figure 16.11. PCA0CN: PCA Control Register ....................................................................156
Figure 16.12. PCA0MD: PCA Mode Register ......................................................................157
Figure 16.13. PCA0CPMn: PCA Capture/Compare Mode Registers ...................................158
Figure 16.14. PCA0L: PCA Counter/Timer Low Byte .........................................................159
Figure 16.15. PCA0H: PCA Counter/Timer High Byte ........................................................159
Figure 16.16. PCA0CPLn: PCA Capture Module Low Byte ................................................160
Figure 16.17. PCA0CPHn: PCA Capture Module High Byte ...............................................160
17. C2 INTERFACE
Figure 17.1. C2ADD: C2 Address Register ..........................................................................161
Figure 17.2. DEVICEID: C2 Device ID Register .................................................................161
Figure 17.3. REVID: C2 Revision ID Register .....................................................................162
Figure 17.4. FPCTL: C2 FLASH Programming Control Register ........................................162
Figure 17.5. FPDAT: C2 FLASH Programming Data Register ............................................162
Figure 17.6. Typical C2 Pin Sharing .....................................................................................163
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 11
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
1.
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
C8051F300/1/2/3/4/5 devices are fully integrated mixed-signal System-on-a-Chip MCUs. Highlighted features are
listed below. Refer to Table 1.1 on page 12 for specific product feature selection.
High-speed pipelined 8051-compatible microcontroller core (up to 25 MIPS)
In-system, full-speed, non-intrusive debug interface (on-chip)
True 8-bit 500 ksps 11-channel ADC with programmable gain pre-amplifier and analog multiplexer
Precision programmable 25 MHz internal oscillator
2/4/8k bytes of on-chip FLASH memory
256 bytes of on-chip RAM
SMBus/I
2
C and Enhanced UART serial interfaces implemented in hardware
Three general-purpose 16-bit timers
Programmable Counter/Timer Array (PCA) with three capture/compare modules and Watchdog Timer function
On-chip Power-On Reset, VDD Monitor, and Temperature Sensor
On-chip Voltage Comparator
Byte-wide I/O Port (5V tolerant)
With on-chip Power-On Reset, VDD monitor, Watchdog Timer, and clock oscillator, the C8051F300/1/2/3/4/5
devices are truly stand-alone System-on-a-Chip solutions. The FLASH memory can be reprogrammed even in-cir-
cuit, providing non-volatile data storage, and also allowing field upgrades of the 8051 firmware. User software has
complete control of all peripherals, and may individually shut down any or all peripherals for power savings.
The on-chip Cygnal 2-Wire (C2) Development Interface allows non-intrusive (uses no on-chip resources), full speed,
in-circuit debugging using the production MCU installed in the final application. This debug logic supports inspec-
tion and modification of memory and registers, setting breakpoints, single stepping, run and halt commands. All ana-
log and digital peripherals are fully functional while debugging using C2. The two C2 interface pins can be shared
with user functions, allowing in-system debugging without occupying package pins.
Each device is specified for 2.7 V-to-3.6 V operation over the industrial temperature range (-45C to +85C). The
Port I/O and /RST pins are tolerant of input signals up to 5 V. The C8051F300/1/2/3/4/5 are available in the 11-pin
MLP package shown in Figure 4.2.
Page 12
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
Table 1.1. Product Selection Guide
MI
P
S
(Peak)
FL
ASH
M
em
o
r
y
RA
M
Cali
b
r
ated
I
n
ter
n
al
O
s
cillat
o
r
SMB
u
s
/
I
2
C
UAR
T
T
i
mer
s
(
16-
bi
t
)
P
r
o
g
ramm
abl
e
Co
un
t
e
r
A
rray
Dig
ital
P
o
r
t
I
/O
s
8-
b
i
t
5
00
ks
p
s
A
D
C
T
e
mp
eratur
e
S
en
s
o
r
An
al
o
g
C
o
mp
arators
Packag
e
C8051F300
25
8k
256
3
8
1
MLP-11
C8051F301
25
8k
256
3
8
-
-
1
MLP-11
C8051F302
25
8k
256
-
3
8
1
MLP-11
C8051F303
25
8k
256
-
3
8
-
-
1
MLP-11
C8051F304
25
4k
256
-
3
8
-
-
1
MLP-11
C8051F305
25
2k
256
-
3
8
-
-
1
MLP-11
Figure 1.1. C8051F300/2 Block Diagram
Port 0
Latch
UART
8kbyte
FLASH
256 byte
SRAM
POR
SFR Bus
8
0
5
1
C
o
r
e
Timer 0, 1
PCA/
WDT
8-bit
500ksps
ADC
A
M
U
X
AIN0-AIN7
P
0
D
r
v
VREF
X
B
A
R
Port I/O Mode
& Config.
XBAR
Control
Reset
XTAL1
XTAL2
External
Oscillator
Circuit
System Clock
Precision
Internal
Oscillator
Clock & Reset
Configuration
Analog/Digital
Power
Debug HW
VDD
ADC
Config. &
Control
SMBus
x2
x4
x2
C2D
C2D
CP0
PGA
+
-
Temp
CP0
P0.0/VREF
P0.1
P0.2/XTAL1
P0.3/XTAL2
P0.4/TX
P0.5/RX
P0.6/CNVSTR
P0.7/C2D
VDD
GND
/RST/C2CK
Brown-
Out
VDD
CNVSTR
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 13
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
Figure 1.2. C8051F301/3/4/5 Block Diagram
Port 0
Latch
UART
8k/4k/2k
byte
FLASH
256 byte
SRAM
POR
SFR Bus
8
0
5
1
C
o
r
e
Timer 0, 1
PCA/
WDT
P
0
D
r
v
X
B
A
R
Port I/O Mode
& Config.
XBAR
Control
Reset
XTAL1
XTAL2
External
Oscillator
Circuit
System Clock
Precision
Internal
Oscillator
Clock & Reset
Configuration
Analog/Digital
Power
Debug HW
SMBus
x2
x4
x2
C2D
C2D
CP0
+
-
CP0
P0.0/VREF
P0.1
P0.2/XTAL1
P0.3/XTAL2
P0.4/TX
P0.5/RX
P0.6
P0.7/C2D
VDD
GND
/RST/C2CK
Brown-
Out
Page 14
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
1.1.
CIP-51TM Microcontroller Core
1.1.1.
Fully 8051 Compatible
The C8051F300/1/2/3/4/5 family utilizes Cygnal's proprietary CIP-51 microcontroller core. The CIP-51 is fully com-
patible with the MCS-51TM instruction set; standard 803x/805x assemblers and compilers can be used to develop soft-
ware. The CIP-51 core offers all the peripherals included with a standard 8052, including two standard 16-bit
counter/timers, one enhanced 16-bit counter/timer with external oscillator input, a full-duplex UART with extended
baud rate configuration, 256 bytes of internal RAM, 128 byte Special Function Register (SFR) address space, and a
byte-wide I/O Port.
1.1.2.
Improved Throughput
The CIP-51 employs a pipelined architecture that greatly increases its instruction throughput over the standard 8051
architecture. In a standard 8051, all instructions except for MUL and DIV take 12 or 24 system clock cycles to exe-
cute with a maximum system clock of 12-to-24 MHz. By contrast, the CIP-51 core executes 70% of its instructions in
one or two system clock cycles, with only four instructions taking more than four system clock cycles.
The CIP-51 has a total of 109 instructions. The table below shows the total number of instrutions that require each
execution time.
With the CIP-51's maximum system clock at 25 MHz, it has a peak throughput of 25 MIPS. Figure 1.3 shows a com-
parison of peak throughputs for various 8-bit microcontroller cores with their maximum system clocks.
Clocks to Execute
1
2
2/3
3
3/4
4
4/5
5
8
Number of Instructions
26
50
5
14
7
3
1
2
1
5
10
15
20
ADuC812
8051
(16MHz clk)
Philips
80C51
(33MHz clk)
Microchip
PIC17C75x
(33MHz clk)
Cygnal
CIP-51
(25MHz clk)
MI
PS
25
Figure 1.3. Comparison of Peak MCU Execution Speeds
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 15
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
1.1.3.
Additional Features
The C8051F300/1/2/3/4/5 SoC family includes several key enhancements to the CIP-51 core and peripherals to
improve performance and ease of use in end applications.
The extended interrupt handler provides 12 interrupt sources into the CIP-51 (as opposed to 7 for the standard 8051),
allowing numerous analog and digital peripherals to interrupt the controller. An interrupt driven system requires less
intervention by the MCU, giving it more effective throughput. The extra interrupt sources are very useful when build-
ing multi-tasking, real-time systems.
Eight reset sources are available: power-on reset circuitry (POR), an on-chip VDD monitor (forces reset when power
supply voltage drops below 2.7 V), a Watchdog Timer, a Missing Clock Detector, a voltage level detection from
Comparator0, a forced software reset, an external reset pin, and an illegal FLASH read/write protection circuit. Each
reset source except for the POR, Reset Input Pin, or FLASH protection may be disabled by the user in software. The
WDT may be permanently enabled in software after a power-on reset during MCU initialization.
The internal oscillator is available as a factory calibrated 24.5 MHz 2% (C8051F300/1 devices); an uncalibrated
version is available on C8051F302/3/4/5 devices. On all C8051F300/1/2/3/4/5 devices, the internal oscillator period
may be user programmed in ~0.5% increments. An external oscillator drive circuit is also included, allowing an
external crystal, ceramic resonator, capacitor, RC, or CMOS clock source to generate the system clock. If desired, the
system clock source may be switched on-the-fly to the external oscillator circuit. An external oscillator can be
extremely useful in low power applications, allowing the MCU to run from a slow (power saving) external crystal
source, while periodically switching to the fast (up to 25 MHz) internal oscillator as needed.
PCA
WDT
Missing
Clock
Detector
(one-
shot)
(Software Reset)
System Reset
Reset
Funnel
P0.x
P0.y
EN
SWRSF
Internal
Oscillator
System
Clock
CIP-51
Microcontroller
Core
Extended Interrupt
Handler
Clock Select
EN
WDT
Ena
b
l
e
MCD
Ena
b
l
e
XTAL1
XTAL2
External
Oscillator
Drive
Illegal
FLASH
Operation
+
-
Comparator 0
C0RSEF
/RST
(wired-OR)
Power On
Reset
+
-
VDD
Supply
Monitor
Enable
'0'
Figure 1.4. On-Chip Clock and Reset
Page 16
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
1.2.
On-Chip Memory
The CIP-51 has a standard 8051 program and data address configuration. It includes 256 bytes of data RAM, with the
upper 128 bytes dual-mapped. Indirect addressing accesses the upper 128 bytes of general purpose RAM, and direct
addressing accesses the 128 byte SFR address space. The lower 128 bytes of RAM are accessible via direct and indi-
rect addressing. The first 32 bytes are addressable as four banks of general purpose registers, and the next 16 bytes
can be byte addressable or bit addressable.
The C8051F300/1/2/3 includes 8k bytes of FLASH program memory (the C8051F304 includes 4k bytes; the
C8051F305 includes 2k bytes). This memory may be reprogrammed in-system in 512 byte sectors, and requires no
special off-chip programming voltage. See Figure 1.5 for the C8051F300/1/2/3 system memory map.
PROGRAM MEMORY
(Direct and Indirect
Addressing)
0x00
0x7F
Upper 128 RAM
(Indirect Addressing
Only)
0x80
0xFF
Special Function
Register's
(Direct Addressing Only)
DATA MEMORY
General Purpose
Registers
0x1F
0x20
0x2F
Bit Addressable
Lower 128 RAM
(Direct and Indirect
Addressing)
0x30
INTERNAL DATA ADDRESS SPACE
8k bytes
FLASH
(In-System
Programmable in 512
Byte Sectors)
0x0000
RESERVED
0x1E00
0x1DFF
Figure 1.5. On-chip Memory Map (C8051F300/1/2/3 shown)
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 17
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
1.3.
On-Chip Debug Circuitry
The C8051F300/1/2/3/4/5 devices include on-chip Cygnal 2-Wire (C2) debug circuitry that provides non-intrusive,
full speed, in-circuit debugging of the production part installed in the end application.
Cygnal's debugging system supports inspection and modification of memory and registers, breakpoints, and single
stepping. No additional target RAM, program memory, timers, or communications channels are required. All the dig-
ital and analog peripherals are functional and work correctly while debugging. All the peripherals (except for the
ADC and SMBus) are stalled when the MCU is halted, during single stepping, or at a breakpoint in order to keep
them synchronized.
The C8051F300DK development kit provides all the hardware and software necessary to develop application code
and perform in-circuit debugging with the C8051F300/1/2/3/4/5 MCUs. The kit includes software with a developer's
studio and debugger, an integrated 8051 assembler, and an RS-232 to C2 serial adapter. It also has a target application
board with the associated MCU installed and large prototyping area, plus the RS-232 and C2 cables, and wall-mount
power supply. The Development Kit requires a Windows 95/98/NT/ME/2000 computer with one available RS-232
serial port. As shown in Figure 1.6, the PC is connected via RS-232 to the Serial Adapter. A six-inch ribbon cable
connects the Serial Adapter to the user's application board, picking up the two C2 pins and VDD and GND. The
Serial Adapter takes its power from the application board; it requires roughly 20 mA at 2.7-3.6V. For applications
where there is not sufficient power available from the target board, the provided power supply can be connected
directly to the Serial Adapter.
The Cygnal IDE interface is a vastly superior developing and debugging configuration, compared to standard MCU
emulators that use on-board "ICE Chips" and require the MCU in the application board to be socketed. Cygnal's
debug paradigm increases ease of use and preserves the performance of the precision analog peripherals.
TARGET PCB
RS-232
Serial
Adapter
VDD
GND
C2 (x2), VDD, GND
WINDOWS 95/98/NT/ME/2000
CYGNAL Integrated
Development Environment
C8051F300
Figure 1.6. Development/In-System Debug Diagram
Page 18
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
1.4.
Programmable Digital I/O and Crossbar
C8051F300/1/2/3/4/5 devices include a byte-wide I/O Port that behaves like a typical 8051 Port with a few enhance-
ments. Each Port pin may be configured as an analog input or a digital I/O pin. Pins selected as digital I/Os may addi-
tionally be configured for push-pull or open-drain output. The "weak pull-ups" that are fixed on typical 8051 devices
may be globally disabled, providing power savings capabilities.
Perhaps the most unique Port I/O enhancement is the Digital Crossbar. This is essentially a digital switching network
that allows mapping of internal digital system resources to Port I/O pins (See Figure 1.7). On-chip counter/timers,
serial buses, HW interrupts, comparator output, and other digital signals in the controller can be configured to appear
on the Port I/O pins specified in the Crossbar Control registers. This allows the user to select the exact mix of general
purpose Port I/O and digital resources needed for the particular application.
1.5.
Serial Ports
The C8051F300/1/2/3/4/5 Family includes an SMBus/I
2
C interface and a full-duplex UART with enhanced baud rate
configuration. Each of the serial buses is fully implemented in hardware and makes extensive use of the CIP-51's
interrupts, thus requiring very little CPU intervention.
Figure 1.7. Digital Crossbar Diagram
XBR0, XBR1,
XBR2 Registers
Digital
Crossbar
Priority
Decoder
SYSCLK
2
2
(I
n
t
e
r
nal
D
i
gital
S
ig
nals
)
Highest
Priority
Lowest
Priority
P0
I/O
Cells
P0.0
P0.7
8
P0MDOUT,
P0MDIN Registers
SMBus
UART
T0, T1
2
4
PCA
P0
Port Latch
(P0.0-P0.7)
8
CP0
Outputs
2
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 19
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
1.6.
Programmable Counter Array
An on-chip Programmable Counter/Timer Array (PCA) is included in addition to the three 16-bit general purpose
counter/timers. The PCA consists of a dedicated 16-bit counter/timer time base with three programmable cap-
ture/compare modules. The PCA clock is derived from one of six sources: the system clock divided by 12, the system
clock divided by 4, Timer 0 overflows, an External Clock Input (ECI), the system clock, or the external oscillator
clock source divided by 8. The external clock source selection is useful for real-time clock functionality, where the
PCA is clocked by an external source while the internal oscillator drives the system clock.
Each capture/compare module can be configured to operate in one of six modes: Edge-Triggered Capture, Software
Timer, High Speed Output, 8- or 16-bit Pulse Width Modulator, or Frequency Output. Additionally, Capture/Compare
Module 2 offers watchdog timer (WDT) capabilities. Following a system reset, Module 2 is configured and enabled
in WDT mode. The PCA Capture/Compare Module I/O and External Clock Input may be routed to Port I/O via the
Digital Crossbar.
16-Bit Counter/Timer
CE
X1
ECI
Digital Crossbar
C
EX2
C
EX0
Port I/O
Capture/Compare
Module 1
Capture/Compare
Module 0
Capture/Compare
Module 2
PCA
CLOCK
MUX
SYSCLK/12
SYSCLK/4
Timer 0 Overflow
ECI
SYSCLK
External Clock/8
Figure 1.8. PCA Block Diagram
Page 20
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
1.7.
8-Bit Analog to Digital Converter (C8051F300/2 Only)
The C8051F300/2 includes an on-chip 8-bit SAR ADC with a 10-channel differential input multiplexer and program-
mable gain amplifier. With a maximum throughput of 500 ksps, the ADC offers true 8-bit accuracy with an INL of
1LSB. The ADC system includes a configurable analog multiplexer that selects both positive and negative ADC
inputs. Each Port pin is available as an ADC input; additionally, the on-chip Temperature Sensor output and the
power supply voltage (VDD) are available as ADC inputs. User firmware may shut down the ADC to save power.
The integrated programmable gain amplifier (PGA) amplifies the the ADC input by 0.5, 1, 2, or 4 as defined by user
software. The gain stage is especially useful when different ADC input channels have widely varied input voltage
signals, or when it is necessary to "zoom in" on a signal with a large DC offset.
Conversions can be started in five ways: a software command, an overflow of Timer 0, 1, or 2, or an external convert
start signal. This flexibility allows the start of conversion to be triggered by software events, a periodic signal (timer
overflows), or external HW signals. Conversion completions are indicated by a status bit and an interrupt (if enabled).
The resulting 8-bit data word is latched into an SFR upon completion of a conversion.
Window compare registers for the ADC data can be configured to interrupt the controller when ADC data is either
within or outside of a specified range. The ADC can monitor a key voltage continuously in background mode, but not
interrupt the controller unless the converted data is within/outside the specified range.
Figure 1.9. 8-Bit ADC Block Diagram
X
VDD
8
9-to-1
AMUX
Temp
Sensor
10-to-1
AMUX
VDD
P0.0
P0.1
P0.2
P0.3
P0.4
P0.5
P0.6
P0.7
P0.0
P0.1
P0.2
P0.3
P0.4
P0.5
P0.6
P0.7
DGND
Programmable Gain
Amplifier
Start
Conversion
Window Compare
Logic
Window
Compare
Interrupt
+
-
Configuration, Control, and Data Registers
Analog Multiplexer
T0 Overflow
TMR2 Overflow
T1 Overflow
Software Write
External
Convert Start
8-Bit
SAR
ADC
End of
Conversion
Interrupt
ADC Data
Register
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 21
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
1.8.
Comparator
C8051F300/1/2/3/4/5 devices include an on-chip voltage comparator that is enabled/disabled and configured via user
software. All Port I/O pins may be configurated as comparator inputs. Two comparator outputs may be routed to a
Port pin if desired: a latched output and/or an unlatched (asynchronous) output. Comparator response time is pro-
grammable, allowing the user to select between high-speed and low-power modes. Positive and negative hysteresis is
also configurable.
Comparator interrupts may be generated on rising, falling, or both edges. When in IDLE mode, these interrupts may
be used as a "wake-up" source. The comparator may also be configured as a reset source.
Reset
Decision
Tree
+
-
Crossbar
Interrupt
Handler
Q
Q
SET
CLR
D
Q
Q
SET
CLR
D
(SYNCHRONIZER)
GND
CP0 +
P0.0
P0.2
P0.4
P0.6
CP0 -
P0.1
P0.3
P0.5
P0.7
VDD
Figure 1.10. Comparator Block Diagram
Page 22
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
2.
ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS
Table 2.1. Absolute Maximum Ratings
*
PARAMETER
CONDITIONS
MIN
TYP
MAX
UNITS
Ambient temperature under bias
-55
125
C
Storage Temperature
-65
150
C
Voltage on any Port I/O Pin or /RST with respect
to GND
-0.3
5.8
V
Voltage on VDD with respect to GND
-0.3
4.2
V
Maximum Total current through VDD and GND
500
mA
Maximum output current sunk by /RST or any
Port pin
100
mA
*
Note: stresses above those listed under "Absolute Maximum Ratings" may cause permanent damage to the device.
This is a stress rating only and functional operation of the devices at those or any other conditions above those indi-
cated in the operation listings of this specification is not implied. Exposure to maximum rating conditions for
extended periods may affect device reliability.
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 23
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
3.
GLOBAL DC ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Table 3.1. Global DC Electrical Characteristics
-40C to +85C, 25 MHz System Clock unless otherwise specified.
PARAMETER
CONDITIONS
MIN
TYP
MAX
UNITS
Digital Supply Voltage
2.7
3.0
3.6
V
Digital Supply Current with
CPU active
VDD=2.7V, Clock=25MHz
VDD=2.7V, Clock=1MHz
VDD=2.7V, Clock=32kHz
5.8
0.34
12
mA
mA
A
Digital Supply Current with
CPU inactive (not accessing
FLASH)
VDD=2.7V, Clock=25MHz
VDD=2.7V, Clock=1MHz
VDD=2.7V, Clock=32kHz
2.1
83
2.8
mA
A
A
Digital Supply Current (shut-
down)
Oscillator not running
< 0.1
A
Digital Supply RAM Data
Retention Voltage
1.5
V
Specified Operating Tempera-
ture Range
-40
+85
C
SYSCLK (system clock fre-
quency)
0
25
MHz
Tsysl (SYSCLK low time)
18
ns
Tsysh (SYSCLK high time)
18
ns
SYSCLK must be at least 32 kHz to enable debugging.
Page 24
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
4.
PINOUT AND PACKAGE DEFINITIONS
Table 4.1. Pin Definitions for the C8051F300/1/2/3/4/5
Pin Number
Name
Type
Description
1
VREF /
P0.0
A In
D I/O or
A In
External Voltage Reference Input.
Port 0.0. See
Section 12
for complete description.
2
P0.1
D I/O or
A In
Port 0.1. See
Section 12
for complete description.
3
VDD
Power Supply Voltage.
4
XTAL1 /
P0.2
A In
D I/O or
A In
Crystal Input. This pin is the external oscillator circuit return for a
crystal or ceramic resonator. See
Section 11.2
.
Port 0.2. See
Section 12
for complete description.
5
XTAL2 /
P0.3
A Out
D I/O
Crystal Input/Output. For an external crystal or resonator, this pin
is the excitation driver. This pin is the external clock input for
CMOS, capacitor, or RC network configurations. See
Section
11.2
.
Port 0.3. See
Section 12
for complete description.
6
P0.4
D I/O or
A In
Port 0.4. See
Section 12
for complete description.
7
P0.5
D I/O or
A In
Port 0.5. See
Section 12
for complete description.
8
C2CK /
/RST
D I/O
D I/O
Clock signal for the C2 Development Interface.
Device Reset. Open-drain output of internal POR or VDD moni-
tor. An external source can initiate a system reset by driving this
pin low for at least 10 s.
9
P0.6 /
CNVSTR
D I/O or
A In
D I/O
Port 0.6. See
Section 12
for complete description.
ADC External Convert Start Input Strobe.
10
C2D /
P0.7
D I/O
D I/O or
A In
Data signal for the C2 Development Interface.
Port 0.7. See
Section 12
for complete description.
11
GND
Ground.
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 25
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
Figure 4.1. MLP-11 Pinout Diagram (Top View)
VREF /
P0.0
P0.1
VDD
XTAL1 /
P0.2
XTAL2 /
P0.3
P0.4
P0.5
C2CK /
/RST
P0.6 /
CNVSTR
C2D /
P0.7
GND
Page 26
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
A
1
e
A3
A2
A
Side E View
Side D View
e
A1
A
A3
A2
L
b
e
E
D
e
E2
D3
LT
LB
k
b
D4
Bottom View
R
D2
E3
Figure 4.2. MLP-11 Package Drawing
MM
MIN
TYP
MAX
A
0.80
0.90
1.00
A1
0
0.02
0.05
A2
0
0.65
1.00
A3
0.25
b
0.18
0.23
0.30
D
3.00
D2
2.20
2.25
D3
2.00
D4
0.386
E
3.00
E2
1.36
E3
1.135
e
0.5
k
0.27
L
0.45
0.55
0.65
LB
0.36
LT
0.37
R
0.09
Table 4.2. MLP-11 Package
Diminsions
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 27
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
0.50 mm
LT
e
E
D
e
LB
k
D2
b
L
D4
0.10 mm
0.50 mm
0.35 mm
0.30 mm
0.10 mm
0.20 mm
0.30 mm
0.20 mm
0.60 mm
0.70 mm
D4
b
0.30 mm
0.35 mm
E2
0.20 mm
Figure 4.3. Typical MLP-11 Solder Mask
Page 28
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
.
LT
e
E
D
e
LB
k
b
L
D4
0.10 mm
0.50 mm
0.35 mm
0.30 mm
0.10 mm
0.20 mm
D4
b
0.30 mm
0.20 mm
E2
D2
0.10 mm
Figure 4.4. Typical MLP-11 Landing Diagram
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 29
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
Notes
Page 30
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 31
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/2
5.
ADC0 (8-BIT ADC, C8051F300/2)
The ADC0 subsystem for the C8051F300/2 consists of two analog multiplexers (referred to collectively as AMUX0)
with 11 total input selections, a differential programmable gain amplifier (PGA), and a 500 ksps, 8-bit successive-
approximation-register ADC with integrated track-and-hold and programmable window detector (see block diagram
in Figure 5.1). The AMUX0, PGA, data conversion modes, and window detector are all configurable under software
control via the Special Function Registers shown in Figure 5.1. ADC0 operates in both Single-ended and Differential
modes, and may be configured to measure any Port pin, the Temperature Sensor output, or VDD with respect to any
Port pin or GND. The ADC0 subsystem is enabled only when the AD0EN bit in the ADC0 Control register
(ADC0CN) is set to logic 1. The ADC0 subsystem is in low power shutdown when this bit is logic 0.
Figure 5.1. ADC0 Functional Block Diagram
AMUX0
+
-
X
VDD
ADC0CF
AM
P0
G
N
0
AM
P0
G
N
1
AD
0
S
C
0
AD
0
S
C
1
AD
0
S
C
2
AD
0
S
C
3
AD
0
S
C
4
8-Bit
SAR
ADC
RE
F
8
SYSC
L
K
ADC
0
16
ADC0CN
AD
0
C
M0
AD
0
C
M1
AD
0
C
M2
AD
0
W
I
N
T
AD
0
B
U
S
Y
AD
0
I
N
T
AD
0
T
M
AD
0
E
N
Timer 0 Overflow
Timer 2 Overflow
Timer 1 Overflow
Start
Conversion
000
AD0BUSY (W)
VDD
ADC0GT
ADC0LT
9-to-1
AMUX
AD0WINT
Temp
Sensor
10-to-1
AMUX
VDD
P0.0
P0.1
P0.2
P0.3
P0.4
P0.5
P0.6
P0.7
P0.0
P0.1
P0.2
P0.3
P0.4
P0.5
P0.6
P0.7
GND
001
010
011
1xx
CNVSTR Input
Comb.
Logic
AMX0SL
AM
X
0
P0
AM
X
0
P1
AM
X
0
P2
AM
X
0
N
3
AM
X
0
N
2
AM
X
0
N
1
AM
X
0
N
0
AM
X
0
P3
Page 32
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/2
5.1.
Analog Multiplexer and PGA
The analog multiplexers (AMUX0) select the positive and negative inputs to the PGA, allowing any Port pin to be
measured relative to any other Port pin or GND. Additionally, the on-chip temperature sensor or the positive power
supply (VDD) may be selected as the positive PGA input. When GND is selected as the negative input, ADC0
operates in Single-ended Mode; all other times, ADC0 operates in Differential Mode.
The ADC0 input channels
are selected in the AMX0SL register as described in Figure 5.6.
The conversion code format differs in Single-ended versus Differential modes, as shown below. When in Single-
ended Mode (negative input is selected GND), conversion codes are represented as 8-bit unsigned integers. Inputs are
measured from `0' to VREF * 255/256. Example codes are shown below.
When in Differential Mode (negative input is not selected as GND), conversion codes are represented as 8-bit signed
2's complement numbers. Inputs are measured from -VREF to VREF * 127/128. Example codes are shown below.
Important Note About ADC0 Input Configuration: Port pins selected as ADC0 inputs should be configured as
analog inputs and should be skipped by the Digital Crossbar. To configure a Port pin for analog input, set to `0' the
corresponding bit in register P0MDIN. To force the Crossbar to skip a Port pin, set to `1' the corresponding bit in reg-
ister XBR0. See
Section "12. Port Input/Output" on page 95
for more Port I/O configuration details.
The PGA amplifies the AMUX0 output signal as defined by the AMP0GN1-0 bits in the ADC0 Configuration regis-
ter (Figure 5.7). The PGA is software-programmable for gains of 0.5, 1, 2, or 4. The gain defaults to 0.5 on reset.
Input Voltage
ADC0 Output (Conversion Code)
VREF * 255/256
0xFF
VREF * 128/256
0x80
VREF * 64/256
0x40
0
0x00
Input Voltage
ADC0 Output (Conversion Code)
VREF * 127/128
0x7F
VREF * 64/128
0x40
0
0x00
-VREF * 64/128
0xC0
- VREF
0x80
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 33
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/2
5.2.
Temperature Sensor
The typical temperature sensor transfer function is shown in Figure 5.2. The output voltage (V
TEMP
) is the positive
PGA input when the temperature sensor is selected by bits AMX0P2-0 in register AMX0SL; this voltage will be
amplified by the PGA according to the user-programmed PGA settings.
The uncalibrated temperature sensor output is extremely linear and suitable for relative temperature measurements
(see Table 5.1 for linearity specifications). For absolute temperature measurements, gain and/or offset calibration is
recommended. Typically a 1-point calibration includes the following steps:
Step 1. Control/measure the ambient temperature (this temperature must be known).
Step 2. Power the device, and delay for a few seconds to allow for self-heating.
Step 3. Perform an ADC conversion with the temperature sensor selected as the positive input and GND
selected as the negative input.
Step 4. Calculate the offset and/or gain characteristics, and store these values in non-volatile memory for
use with subsequent temperature sensor measurements.
Figure 5.3 shows the typical temperature sensor error assuming a 1-point calibration at 25 C. Note that parameters
which affect ADC measurement, in particular the voltage reference value, will also affect temperature mea-
surement.
Figure 5.2. Typical Temperature Sensor Transfer Function
0
-50
50
100
(Celsius)
V
TEMP
= 3.35*(TEMP
C
) + 897 mV
700
800
900
1000
1100
(mV)
1200
Page 34
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/2
-40.00
-20.00
0.00
20.00
40.00
60.00
80.00
Temperature (degrees C)
E
r
r
o
r
(
de
gr
e
e
s
C
)
-5.00
-4.00
-3.00
-2.00
-1.00
0.00
1.00
2.00
3.00
4.00
5.00
-5.00
-4.00
-3.00
-2.00
-1.00
0.00
1.00
2.00
3.00
4.00
5.00
Figure 5.3. Temperature Sensor Error with 1-Point Calibration (VREF = 2.40 V)
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 35
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/2
5.3.
Modes of Operation
ADC0 has a maximum conversion speed of 500 ksps. The ADC0 conversion clock is a divided version of the system
clock, determined by the AD0SC bits in the ADC0CF register (system clock divided by (AD0SC + 1) for
0
AD0SC 31).
5.3.1.
Starting a Conversion
A conversion can be initiated in one of five ways, depending on the programmed states of the ADC0 Start of Conver-
sion Mode bits (AD0CM2-0) in register ADC0CN. Conversions may be initiated by one of the following:
1.
Writing a `1' to the AD0BUSY bit of register ADC0CN
2.
A Timer 0 overflow (i.e. timed continuous conversions)
3.
A Timer 2 overflow
4.
A Timer 1 overflow
5.
A rising edge on the CNVSTR input signal (pin P0.6)
Writing a `1' to AD0BUSY provides software control of ADC0 whereby conversions are performed "on-demand".
During conversion, the AD0BUSY bit is set to logic 1 and reset to logic 0 when the conversion is complete. The fall-
ing edge of AD0BUSY triggers an interrupt (when enabled) and sets the ADC0 interrupt flag (AD0INT). Note: When
polling for ADC conversion completions, the ADC0 interrupt flag (AD0INT) should be used. Converted data is avail-
able in the ADC0 data register, ADC0, when bit AD0INT is logic 1. Note that when Timer 2 overflows are used as
the conversion source, Timer 2 Low Byte overflows are used if Timer 2 is in 8-bit mode; Timer 2 High byte over-
flows are used if Timer 2 is in 16-bit mode. See
Section "15. Timers" on page 133
for timer configuration.
Important Note About Using CNVSTR: The CNVSTR input pin also functions as Port pin P0.6. When the
CNVSTR input is used as the ADC0 conversion source, Port pin P0.6 should be skipped by the Digital Crossbar. To
configure the Crossbar to skip P0.6, set to `1' Bit6 in register XBR0. See
Section "12. Port Input/Output" on
page 95
for details on Port I/O configuration.
Page 36
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/2
5.3.2.
Tracking Modes
The AD0TM bit in register ADC0CN controls the ADC0 track-and-hold mode. In its default state, the ADC0 input is
continuously tracked except when a conversion is in progress. When the AD0TM bit is logic 1, ADC0 operates in
low-power track-and-hold mode. In this mode, each conversion is preceded by a tracking period of 3 SAR clocks
(after the start-of-conversion signal). When the CNVSTR signal is used to initiate conversions in low-power tracking
mode, ADC0 tracks only when CNVSTR is low; conversion begins on the rising edge of CNVSTR (see Figure 5.4).
Tracking can also be disabled (shutdown) when the device is in low power standby or sleep modes. Low-power track-
and-hold mode is also useful when AMUX or PGA settings are frequently changed, due to the settling time require-
ments described in
Section "5.3.3. Settling Time Requirements" on page 37
.
Figure 5.4. 8-Bit ADC Track and Conversion Example Timing
Write '1' to AD0BUSY,
Timer 0, Timer 2, Timer 1 Overflow
(AD0CM[2:0]=000, 001, 010, 011)
AD0TM=1
Track
Convert
Low Power Mode
AD0TM=0
Track or
Convert
Convert
Track
Low Power
or Convert
SAR Clocks
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SAR Clocks
B. ADC Timing for Internal Trigger Source
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CNVSTR
(AD0CM[2:0]=1xx)
AD0TM=1
A. ADC Timing for External Trigger Source
SAR Clocks
Track or Convert
Convert
Track
AD0TM=0
Track
Convert
Low Power Mode
Low Power
or Convert
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 37
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/2
5.3.3.
Settling Time Requirements
When the ADC0 input configuration is changed (i.e., a different AMUX0 or PGA selection is made), a minimum
tracking time is required before an accurate conversion can be performed. This tracking time is determined by the
AMUX0 resistance, the ADC0 sampling capacitance, any external source resistance, and the accuracy required for
the conversion. Note that in low-power tracking mode, three SAR clocks are used for tracking at the start of every
conversion. For most applications, these three SAR clocks will meet the minimum tracking time requirements.
Figure 5.5 shows the equivalent ADC0 input circuits for both Differential and Single-ended modes. Notice that the
equivalent time constant for both input circuits is the same. The required ADC0 settling time for a given settling
accuracy (SA) may be approximated by Equation 5.1. When measuring the Temperature Sensor output or VDD with
respect to GND, R
TOTAL
reduces to R
MUX
. See Table 5.1 for ADC0 minimum settling time (track/hold time) require-
ments.
Where:
SA is the settling accuracy, given as a fraction of an LSB (for example, 0.25 to settle within 1/4 LSB)
t is the required settling time in seconds
R
TOTAL
is the sum of the AMUX0 resistance and any external source resistance.
n is the ADC resolution in bits (8).
Equation 5.1. ADC0 Settling Time Requirements
t
2
n
SA
-------
R
TOTAL
C
SAMPLE
ln
=
R
MUX
= 5k
RC
Input
= R
MUX
* C
SAMPLE
R
MUX
= 5k
C
SAMPLE
= 5pF
C
SAMPLE
= 5pF
MUX Select
MUX Select
Differential Mode
P0.x
P0.y
R
MUX
= 5k
C
SAMPLE
= 5pF
RC
Input
= R
MUX
* C
SAMPLE
MUX Select
Single-Ended Mode
P0.x
Note: When the PGA gain is set to 0.5, C
SAMPLE
= 3pF
Figure 5.5. ADC0 Equivalent Input Circuits
Page 38
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/2
Figure 5.6. AMX0SL: AMUX0 Channel Select Register (C8051F300/2)
Bits7-4:
AMX0N3-0: AMUX0 Negative Input Selection.
Note that when GND is selected as the Negative Input, ADC0 operates in Single-ended mode. For all
other Negative Input selections, ADC0 operates in Differential mode.
0000-1000b: ADC0 Negative Input selected per the chart below.
Bits3-0:
AMX0P3-0: AMUX0 Positive Input Selection.
0000-1001b: ADC0 Positive Input selected per the chart below.
1010-1111b: RESERVED.
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
AMX0N3
AMX0N2
AMX0N1
AMX0N0
AMX0P3
AMX0P2
AMX0P1
AMX0P0
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address:
0xBB
AMX0N3-0
ADC0 Negative Input
0000
P0.0
0001
P0.1
0010
P0.2
0011
P0.3
0100
P0.4
0101
P0.5
0110
P0.6
0111
P0.7
1xxx
GND (ADC in Single-Ended Mode)
AMX0P3-0
ADC0 Positive Input
0000
P0.0
0001
P0.1
0010
P0.2
0011
P0.3
0100
P0.4
0101
P0.5
0110
P0.6
0111
P0.7
1000
Temperature Sensor
1001
VDD
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 39
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/2
Figure 5.7. ADC0CF: ADC0 Configuration Register (C8051F300/2)
Bits7-3:
AD0SC4-0: ADC0 SAR Conversion Clock Period Bits.
SAR Conversion clock is derived from system clock by the following equation, where AD0SC refers
to the 5-bit value held in bits AD0SC4-0. SAR Conversion clock requirements are given in Table 5.1.
Bit2:
UNUSED. Read = 0b; Write = don't care.
Bits1-0:
AMP0GN1-0: ADC0 Internal Amplifier Gain (PGA).
00: Gain = 0.5
01: Gain = 1
10: Gain = 2
11: Gain = 4
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
AD0SC4
AD0SC3
AD0SC2
AD0SC1
AD0SC0
-
AMP0GN1 AMP0GN0 11111000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address:
0xBC
AD0SC
SYSCLK
CLK
SAR
----------------------
1
=
Figure 5.8. ADC0: ADC0 Data Word Register (C8051F300/2)
Bits7-0:
ADC0 Data Word.
ADC0 holds the output data byte from the last ADC0 conversion. When in Single-ended mode,
ADC0 holds an 8-bit unsigned integer. When in Differential mode, ADC0 holds a 2's complement
signed 8-bit integer.
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address:
0xBE
Page 40
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/2
Figure 5.9. ADC0CN: ADC0 Control Register (C8051F300/2)
Bit7:
AD0EN: ADC0 Enable Bit.
0: ADC0 Disabled. ADC0 is in low-power shutdown.
1: ADC0 Enabled. ADC0 is active and ready for data conversions.
Bit6:
AD0TM: ADC0 Track Mode Bit.
0: Normal Track Mode: When ADC0 is enabled, tracking is continuous unless a conversion is in
progress.
1: Low-power Track Mode: Tracking Defined by AD0CM2-0 bits (see below).
Bit5:
AD0INT: ADC0 Conversion Complete Interrupt Flag.
0: ADC0 has not completed a data conversion since the last time AD0INT was cleared.
1: ADC0 has completed a data conversion.
Bit4:
AD0BUSY: ADC0 Busy Bit.
Read: Unused.
Write:
0: No Effect.
1: Initiates ADC0 Conversion if AD0CM2-0 = 000b
Bit3:
AD0WINT: ADC0 Window Compare Interrupt Flag.
0: ADC0 Window Comparison Data match has not occurred since this flag was last cleared.
1: ADC0 Window Comparison Data match has occurred.
Bits2-0:
AD0CM2-0: ADC0 Start of Conversion Mode Select.
When AD0TM = 0:
000: ADC0 conversion initiated on every write of `1' to AD0BUSY.
001: ADC0 conversion initiated on overflow of Timer 0.
010: ADC0 conversion initiated on overflow of Timer 2.
011: ADC0 conversion initiated on overflow of Timer 1.
1xx: ADC0 conversion initiated on rising edge of external CNVSTR.
When AD0TM = 1:
000: Tracking initiated on write of `1' to AD0BUSY and lasts 3 SAR clocks, followed by conversion.
001: Tracking initiated on overflow of Timer 0 and lasts 3 SAR clocks, followed by conversion.
010: Tracking initiated on overflow of Timer 2 and lasts 3 SAR clocks, followed by conversion.
011: Tracking initiated on overflow of Timer 1 and lasts 3 SAR clocks, followed by conversion.
1xx: ADC0 tracks only when CNVSTR input is logic low; conversion starts on rising CNVSTR
edge.
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
AD0EN
AD0TM
AD0INT AD0BUSY AD0WINT AD0CM2
AD0CM1
AD0CM0
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address:
(bit addressable)
0xE8
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 41
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/2
5.4.
Programmable Window Detector
The ADC Programmable Window Detector continuously compares the ADC0 output to user-programmed limits, and
notifies the system when a desired condition is detected. This is especially effective in an interrupt-driven system,
saving code space and CPU bandwidth while delivering faster system response times. The window detector interrupt
flag (AD0WINT in register ADC0CN) can also be used in polled mode. The ADC0 Greater-Than (ADC0GT) and
Less-Than (ADC0LT) registers hold the comparison values. Example comparisons for Single-ended and Differential
modes are shown in Figure 5.10 and Figure 5.11, respectively. Notice that the window detector flag can be pro-
grammed to indicate when measured data is inside or outside of the user-programmed limits depending on the con-
tents of the ADC0LT and ADC0GT registers.
5.4.1.
Window Detector In Single-Ended Mode
Figure 5.10 shows two example window comparisons for Single-ended mode, with ADC0LT = 0x20 and
ADC0GT = 0x10. Notice that in Single-ended mode, the codes vary from 0 to VREF*(255/256) and are represented
as 8-bit unsigned integers. In the left example, an AD0WINT interrupt will be generated if the ADC0 conversion
word (ADC0) is within the range defined by ADC0GT and ADC0LT (if 0x10
< ADC0 < 0x20). In the right example,
and AD0WINT interrupt will be generated if ADC0 is outside of the range defined by ADC0GT and ADC0LT
(if ADC0
< 0x10 or ADC0 > 0x20).
Figure 5.10. ADC Window Compare Examples, Single-Ended Mode
0xFF
0x21
0x20
0x1F
0x11
0x10
0x0F
0x00
0
Input Voltage
(P0.x - GND)
REF x (255/256)
REF x (32/256)
REF x (16/256)
AD0WINT=1
AD0WINT
not affected
AD0WINT
not affected
ADC0LT
ADC0GT
0xFF
0x21
0x20
0x1F
0x11
0x10
0x0F
0x00
0
Input Voltage
(P0.x - GND)
REF x (255/256)
REF x (32/256)
REF x (16/256)
AD0WINT
not affected
ADC0GT
ADC0LT
AD0WINT=1
AD0WINT=1
ADC0
ADC0
Page 42
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/2
5.4.2.
Window Detector In Differential Mode
Figure 5.11 shows two example window comparisons for differential mode, with ADC0LT = 0x10 (+16d) and
ADC0GT = 0xFF (-1d). Notice that in Differential mode, the codes vary from -VREF to VREF*(127/128) and are
represented as 8-bit 2's complement signed integers. In the left example, an AD0WINT interrupt will be generated if
the ADC0 conversion word (ADC0L) is within the range defined by ADC0GT and ADC0LT (if 0xFF (-1d) < ADC0
< 0x10 (16d)). In the right example, an AD0WINT interrupt will be generated if ADC0 is outside of the range defined
by ADC0GT and ADC0LT (if ADC0 < 0xFF (-1d) or ADC0 > 0x10 (+16d)).
Figure 5.11. ADC Window Compare Examples, Differential Mode
0x7F (127d)
0x11 (17d)
0x10 (16d)
0x0F (15d)
0x00 (0d)
0xFF (-1d)
0xFE (-2d)
0x80 (-128d)
-REF
Input Voltage
(P0.x - P0.y)
REF x (127/128)
REF x (16/128)
REF x (-1/256)
0x7F (127d)
0x11 (17d)
0x10 (16d)
0x0F (15d)
0x00 (0d)
0xFF (-1d)
0xFE (-2d)
0x80 (-128d)
-REF
Input Voltage
(P0.x - P0.y)
REF x (127/128)
REF x (16/128)
REF x (-1/256)
AD0WINT=1
AD0WINT
not affected
AD0WINT
not affected
ADC0LT
ADC0GT
AD0WINT
not affected
ADC0GT
ADC0LT
AD0WINT=1
AD0WINT=1
ADC0
ADC0
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 43
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/2
Figure 5.12. ADC0GT: ADC0 Greater-Than Data Byte Register (C8051F300/2)
Bits7-0: ADC0 Greater-Than Data Word.
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
11111111
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address:
0xC4
Figure 5.13. ADC0LT: ADC0 Less-Than Data Byte Register (C8051F300/2)
Bits7-0: ADC0 Less-Than Data Word.
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address:
0xC6
Page 44
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/2
Table 5.1. ADC0 Electrical Characteristics
VDD = 3.0 V, VREF = 2.40 V (REFSL=0), PGA Gain = 1, -40C to +85C unless otherwise specified
PARAMETER
CONDITIONS
MIN
TYP
MAX
UNITS
DC ACCURACY
Resolution
8
bits
Integral Nonlinearity
0.5
1
LSB
Differential Nonlinearity
Guaranteed Monotonic
0.5
1
LSB
Offset Error
Note 1
0.50.6
LSB
Full Scale Error
Differential mode; See Note 1
-10.5
LSB
Offset Temperature Coefficient
TBD
ppm/C
DYNAMIC PERFORMANCE (10 kHz sine-wave Differential input, 1 dB below Full Scale, 500 ksps)
Signal-to-Noise Plus Distortion
45
48
dB
Total Harmonic Distortion
Up to the 5
th
harmonic
-56
dB
Spurious-Free Dynamic Range
58
dB
CONVERSION RATE
SAR Conversion Clock
6
MHz
Conversion Time in SAR Clocks
8
clocks
Track/Hold Acquisition Time
300
ns
Throughput Rate
500
ksps
ANALOG INPUTS
Input Voltage Range
0
VREF
V
Input Capacitance
5
pF
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Linearity
Notes 1, 2, 3
0.5
C
Gain
Notes 1, 2, 3
3350
110
V / C
Offset
Notes 1, 2, 3 (Temp = 0 C)
89731
mV
POWER SPECIFICATIONS
Power Supply Current (VDD sup-
plied to ADC0)
Operating Mode, 500 ksps
400
900
A
Power Supply Rejection
0.3
mV/V
Note 1: Represents one standard deviation from the mean.
Note 2: Measured with PGA Gain = 2.
Note 3: Includes ADC offset, gain, and linearity variations.
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 45
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/2
6.
VOLTAGE REFERENCE (C8051F300/2)
The voltage reference MUX on C8051F300/2 devices is configurable to use an externally connected voltage refer-
ence or the power supply voltage, VDD (see Figure 6.1). The REFSL bit in the Reference Control register (REF0CN)
selects the reference source. For an external source, REFSL should be set to `0'; For VDD as the reference source,
REFSL should be set to `1'.
The BIASE bit enables the internal voltage bias generator, which is used by the ADC, Temperature Sensor, and Inter-
nal Oscillator. This bit is forced to logic 1 when any of the aforementioned peripherals is enabled. The bias generator
may be enabled manually by writing a `1' to the BIASE bit in register REF0CN; see Figure 6.2 for REF0CN register
details. The electrical specifications for the voltage reference circuit are given in Table 6.1.
Important Note About the VREF Input: Port pin P0.0 is used as the external VREF input. When using an external
voltage reference, P0.0 should be configured as analog input and skipped by the Digital Crossbar. To configure P0.0
as analog input, set to `1' Bit0 in register P0MDIN. To configure the Crossbar to skip P0.0, set to `1' Bit0 in register
XBR0. Refer to
Section "12. Port Input/Output" on page 95
for complete Port I/O configuration details. The exter-
nal reference voltage must be within the range 0
VREF VDD.
On C8051F300/2 devices, the temperature sensor connects to the highest order input of the ADC0 positive input mul-
tiplexer (see
Section "5.1. Analog Multiplexer and PGA" on page 32
for details). The TEMPE bit in register
REF0CN enables/disables the temperature sensor. While disabled, the temperature sensor defaults to a high imped-
ance state and any ADC0 measurements performed on the sensor result in meaningless data.
Figure 6.1. Voltage Reference Functional Block Diagram
Internal
VREF
(to ADC)
To Analog Mux
VDD
VREF
R1
VDD
External
Voltage
Reference
Circuit
GND
REF0CN
RE
FS
L
TE
MP
E
BIASE
Temp Sensor
EN
Bias Generator
To ADC, Internal
Oscillator,
Temperature Sensor
EN
IOSCEN
0
1
Page 46
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/2
Table 6.1. External Voltage Reference Circuit Electrical Characteristics
VDD = 3.0 V; -40C to +85C unless otherwise specified
PARAMETER
CONDITIONS
MIN
TYP
MAX
UNITS
Input Voltage Range
0
VDD
V
Input Current
Sample Rate = 500 ksps; VREF = 3.0 V
12
A
Figure 6.2. REF0CN: Reference Control Register
Bits7-3:
UNUSED. Read = 00000b; Write = don't care.
Bit3:
REFSL: Voltage Reference Select.
This bit selects the source for the internal voltage reference.
0: VREF input pin used as voltage reference.
1: VDD used as voltage reference.
Bit2:
TEMPE: Temperature Sensor Enable Bit.
0: Internal Temperature Sensor off.
1: Internal Temperature Sensor on.
Bit1:
BIASE: Internal Analog Bias Generator Enable Bit. (Must be `1' if using ADC).
0: Internal Bias Generator off.
1: Internal Bias Generator on.
Bit0:
UNUSED. Read = 0b. Write = don't care.
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
-
-
-
-
REFSL
TEMPE
BIASE
-
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address:
0xD1
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 47
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
7.
COMPARATOR0
C8051F300/1/2/3/4/5 devices include an on-chip programmable voltage comparator, which is shown in Figure 7.1.
Comparator0 offers programmable response time and hysteresis, an analog input multiplexer, and two outputs that are
optionally available at the Port pins: a synchronous "latched" output (CP0), or an asynchronous "raw" output
(CP0A). The asynchronous CP0A signal is available even when the system clock is not active. This allows
Comparator0 to operate and generate an output with the device in STOP mode. When assigned to a Port pin, the
Comparator0 output may be configured as open drain or push-pull (see
Section "12.2. Port I/O Initialization" on
page 98
). Comparator0 may also be used as a reset source (see
Section "9.5. Comparator0 Reset" on page 79
).
The inputs for Comparator0 are selected in the CPT0MX register (Figure 7.4). The CMX0P1-CMX0P0 bits select the
Comparator0 positive input; the CMX0N1-CMX0N0 bits select the Comparator0 negative input.
Important Note About Comparator Inputs: The Port pins selected as comparator inputs should be configured as
analog inputs in their associated Port configuration register, and configured to be skipped by the Crossbar (for details
on Port configuration, see
Section "12.3. General Purpose Port I/O" on page 101
).
VDD
CPT
0
CN
Reset
Decision
Tree
+
-
Crossbar
Interrupt
Logic
Q
Q
SET
CLR
D
Q
Q
SET
CLR
D
(SYNCHRONIZER)
GND
CP0 +
P0.0
P0.2
P0.4
P0.6
CP0 -
P0.1
P0.3
P0.5
P0.7
CP0EN
CP0OUT
CP0RIF
CP0FIF
CP0HYP1
CP0HYP0
CP0HYN1
CP0HYN0
CP
T
0
M
X
CMX0N1
CMX0N0
CMX0P1
CMX0P0
CP
T0MD
CP0MD1
CP0MD0
CP0
Rising-edge
Interrupt Flag
CP0
Falling-edge
Interrupt Flag
CP0
CP0A
Figure 7.1. Comparator0 Functional Block Diagram
Page 48
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
The output of Comparator0 can be polled in software, used as an interrupt source, and/or routed to a Port pin. When
routed to a Port pin, the Comparator0 output is available asynchronous or synchronous to the system clock; the asyn-
chronous output is available even in STOP mode (with no system clock active). When disabled, the Comparator0 out-
put (if assigned to a Port I/O pin via the Crossbar) defaults to the logic low state, and its supply current falls to less
than 100 nA. See
Section "12.1. Priority Crossbar Decoder" on page 96
for details on configuring the
Comparator0 output via the digital Crossbar. Comparator0 inputs can be externally driven from -0.25 V to
(VDD) + 0.25 V without damage or upset. The complete electrical specifications for Comparator0 are given in
Table 7.1.
The Comparator0 response time may be configured in software via the CP0MD1-0 bits in register CPT0MD (see
Figure 7.5). Selecting a longer response time reduces the amount of power consumed by Comparator0. See Table 7.1
for complete timing and power consumption specifications.
The hysteresis of Comparator0 is software-programmable via its Comparator0 Control register (CPT0CN). The user
can program both the amount of hysteresis voltage (referred to the input voltage) and the positive and negative-going
symmetry of this hysteresis around the threshold voltage.
The Comparator0 hysteresis is programmed using Bits3-0 in the Comparator0 Control Register CPT0CN (shown in
Figure 7.3). The amount of negative hysteresis voltage is determined by the settings of the CP0HYN bits. As shown
in Figure 7.2, settings of 20, 10 or 5 mV of negative hysteresis can be programmed, or negative hysteresis can be dis-
abled. In a similar way, the amount of positive hysteresis is determined by the setting the CP0HYP bits.
Positive Hysteresis Voltage
(Programmed with CP0HYP Bits)
Negative Hysteresis Voltage
(Programmed by CP0HYN Bits)
VIN-
VIN+
INPUTS
CIRCUIT CONFIGURATION
+
_
CP0+
CP0-
CP0
VIN+
VIN-
OUT
V
OH
Positive Hysteresis
Disabled
Maximum
Positive Hysteresis
Negative Hysteresis
Disabled
Maximum
Negative Hysteresis
OUTPUT
V
OL
Figure 7.2. Comparator Hysteresis Plot
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 49
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
Comparator0 interrupts can be generated on both rising-edge and falling-edge output transitions. (For Interrupt
enable and priority control, see
Section "8.3. Interrupt Handler" on page 67
). The CP0FIF flag is set to logic 1
upon a Comparator0 falling-edge interrupt, and the CP0RIF flag is set to logic 1 upon the Comparator0 rising-edge
interrupt. Once set, these bits remain set until cleared by software. The output state of Comparator0 can be obtained at
any time by reading the CP0OUT bit. Comparator0 is enabled by setting the CP0EN bit to logic 1, and is disabled by
clearing this bit to logic 0.
Figure 7.3. CPT0CN: Comparator0 Control Register
Bit7:
CP0EN: Comparator0 Enable Bit.
0: Comparator0 Disabled.
1: Comparator0 Enabled.
Bit6:
CP0OUT: Comparator0 Output State Flag.
0: Voltage on CP0+ < CP0-.
1: Voltage on CP0+ > CP0-.
Bit5:
CP0RIF: Comparator0 Rising-Edge Interrupt Flag.
0: No Comparator0 Rising Edge Interrupt has occurred since this flag was last cleared.
1: Comparator0 Rising Edge Interrupt has occurred.
Bit4:
CP0FIF: Comparator0 Falling-Edge Interrupt Flag.
0: No Comparator0 Falling-Edge Interrupt has occurred since this flag was last cleared.
1: Comparator0 Falling-Edge Interrupt has occurred.
Bits3-2:
CP0HYP1-0: Comparator0 Positive Hysteresis Control Bits.
00: Positive Hysteresis Disabled.
01: Positive Hysteresis = 5 mV.
10: Positive Hysteresis = 10 mV.
11: Positive Hysteresis = 20 mV.
Bits1-0:
CP0HYN1-0: Comparator0 Negative Hysteresis Control Bits.
00: Negative Hysteresis Disabled.
01: Negative Hysteresis = 5 mV.
10: Negative Hysteresis = 10 mV.
11: Negative Hysteresis = 20 mV.
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
CP0EN
CP0OUT
CP0RIF
CP0FIF
CP0HYP1 CP0HYP0 CP0HYN1 CP0HYN0 00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address:
0xF8
Page 50
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
Figure 7.4. CPT0MX: Comparator0 MUX Selection Register
Bits7-6:
UNUSED. Read = 00b, Write = don't care.
Bits6-4:
CMX0N1-CMX0N0: Comparator0 Negative Input MUX Select.
These bits select which Port pin is used as the Comparator0 negative input.
Bits3-2:
UNUSED. Read = 00b, Write = don't care.
Bits1-0:
CMX0P1-CMX0P0: Comparator0 Positive Input MUX Select.
These bits select which Port pin is used as the Comparator0 positive input.
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
-
-
CMX0N1
CMX0N0
-
-
CMX0P1
CMX0P0
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address:
0x9F
CMX0N1 CMX0N0
Negative Input
0
0
P0.1
0
1
P0.3
1
0
P0.5
1
1
P0.7
CMX0P1 CMX0P0
Positive Input
0
0
P0.0
0
1
P0.2
1
0
P0.4
1
1
P0.6
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 51
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
Figure 7.5. CPT0MD: Comparator0 Mode Selection Register
Bits7-2:
UNUSED. Read = 000000b, Write = don't care.
Bits1-0:
CP0MD1-CP0MD0: Comparator0 Mode Select.
These bits select the response time for Comparator0.
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
-
-
-
-
-
-
CP0MD1
CP0MD0
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address:
0x9D
Mode
CP0MD1
CP0MD0
CP0 Response Time (TYP)
0
0
0
100 ns
1
0
1
175 ns
2
1
0
320 ns
3
1
1
1050 ns
Page 52
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
Table 7.1. Comparator0 Electrical Characteristics
VDD = 3.0 V, -40C to +85C unless otherwise specified.
PARAMETER
CONDITIONS
MIN
TYP
MAX
UNITS
Response Time:
Mode 0, Vcm
= 1.5 V
CP0+ - CP0- = 100 mV
100
ns
CP0+ - CP0- = -100 mV
250
ns
Response Time:
Mode 1, Vcm
= 1.5 V
CP0+ - CP0- = 100 mV
175
ns
CP0+ - CP0- = -100 mV
500
ns
Response Time:
Mode 2, Vcm
= 1.5 V
CP0+ - CP0- = 100 mV
320
ns
CP0+ - CP0- = -100 mV
1100
ns
Response Time:
Mode 3, Vcm
= 1.5 V
CP0+ - CP0- = 100 mV
1050
ns
CP0+ - CP0- = -100 mV
5200
ns
Common-Mode Rejection Ratio
1.5
4
mV/V
Positive Hysteresis 1
CP0HYP1-0 = 00
0
1
mV
Positive Hysteresis 2
CP0HYP1-0 = 01
3
5
7
mV
Positive Hysteresis 3
CP0HYP1-0 = 10
7
10
15
mV
Positive Hysteresis 4
CP0HYP1-0 = 11
15
20
25
mV
Negative Hysteresis 1
CP0HYN1-0 = 00
0
1
mV
Negative Hysteresis 2
CP0HYN1-0 = 01
3
5
7
mV
Negative Hysteresis 3
CP0HYN1-0 = 10
7
10
15
mV
Negative Hysteresis 4
CP0HYN1-0 = 11
15
20
25
mV
Inverting or Non-Inverting Input
Voltage Range
-0.25
VDD +
0.25
V
Input Capacitance
7
pF
Input Bias Current
-5
0.001
+5
nA
Input Offset Voltage
-5
+5
mV
POWER SUPPLY
Power Supply Rejection
0.1
1
mV/V
Power-up Time
10
s
Supply Current at DC
Mode 0
7.6
A
Mode 1
3.2
A
Mode 2
1.3
A
Mode 3
0.4
A
Vcm is the common-mode voltage on CP0+ and CP0-.
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 53
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
8.
CIP-51 MICROCONTROLLER
The MCU system controller core is the CIP-51 microcontroller. The CIP-51 is fully compatible with the MCS-51TM
instruction set; standard 803x/805x assemblers and compilers can be used to develop software. The MCU family has
a superset of all the peripherals included with a standard 8051. Included are three 16-bit counter/timers (see descrip-
tion in
Section 15
), an enhanced full-duplex UART (see description in
Section 14
), 256 bytes of internal RAM,
128 byte Special Function Register (SFR) address space (
Section 8.2.6
), and one byte-wide I/O Port (see description
in
Section 12
). The CIP-51 also includes on-chip debug hardware (see description in
Section 17
), and interfaces
directly with the analog and digital subsystems providing a complete data acquisition or control-system solution in a
single integrated circuit.
The CIP-51 Microcontroller core implements the standard 8051 organization and peripherals as well as additional
custom peripherals and functions to extend its capability (see Figure 8.1 for a block diagram). The CIP-51 includes
the following features:
-
Fully Compatible with MCS-51 Instruction Set
-
Extended Interrupt Handler
-
25 MIPS Peak Throughput with 25 MHz Clock
-
Reset Input
-
0 to 25 MHz Clock Frequency
-
Power Management Modes
-
256 Bytes of Internal RAM
-
On-chip Debug Logic
-
Byte-Wide I/O Port
-
Program and Data Memory Security
DATA BUS
TMP1
TMP2
PRGM. ADDRESS REG.
PC INCREMENTER
ALU
PSW
DATA BUS
DA
T
A
B
U
S
MEMORY
INTERFACE
MEM_ADDRESS
D8
PIPELINE
BUFFER
DATA POINTER
INTERRUPT
INTERFACE
SYSTEM_IRQs
EMULATION_IRQ
MEM_CONTROL
CONTROL
LOGIC
A16
PROGRAM COUNTER (PC)
STOP
CLOCK
RESET
IDLE
POWER CONTROL
REGISTER
DA
TA
B
U
S
SFR
BUS
INTERFACE
SFR_ADDRESS
SFR_CONTROL
SFR_WRITE_DATA
SFR_READ_DATA
D8
D8
B REGISTER
D8
D8
ACCUMULATOR
D8
D8
D8
D8
D8
D8
D8
D8
MEM_WRITE_DATA
MEM_READ_DATA
D8
SRAM
ADDRESS
REGISTER
SRAM
(256 X 8)
D8
STACK POINTER
D8
Figure 8.1. CIP-51 Block Diagram
Page 54
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
Performance
The CIP-51 employs a pipelined architecture that greatly increases its instruction throughput over the standard 8051
architecture. In a standard 8051, all instructions except for MUL and DIV take 12 or 24 system clock cycles to exe-
cute, and usually have a maximum system clock of 12 MHz. By contrast, the CIP-51 core executes 70% of its instruc-
tions in one or two system clock cycles, with no instructions taking more than eight system clock cycles.
With the CIP-51's maximum system clock at 25 MHz, it has a peak throughput of 25 MIPS. The CIP-51 has a total of
109 instructions. The table below shows the total number of instrutions that require each execution time.
Programming and Debugging Support
In-system programming of the FLASH program memory and communication with on-chip debug support logic is
accomplished via the Cygnal 2-Wire Development Interface (C2). Note that the re-programmable FLASH can also be
read and changed a single byte at a time by the application software using the MOVC and MOVX instructions. This
feature allows program memory to be used for non-volatile data storage as well as updating program code under soft-
ware control.
The on-chip debug support logic facilitates full speed in-circuit debugging, allowing the setting of hardware break-
points, starting, stopping and single stepping through program execution (including interrupt service routines), exam-
ination of the program's call stack, and reading/writing the contents of registers and memory. This method of on-chip
debugging is completely non-intrusive, requiring no RAM, Stack, timers, or other on-chip resources. C2 details can
be found in
Section "17. C2 Interface" on page 161
.
The CIP-51 is supported by development tools from Cygnal Integrated Products and third party vendors. Cygnal pro-
vides an integrated development environment (IDE) including editor, macro assembler, debugger and programmer.
The IDE's debugger and programmer interface to the CIP-51 via the C2 interface to provide fast and efficient in-sys-
tem device programming and debugging. Third party macro assemblers and C compilers are also available.
Clocks to Execute
1
2
2/3
3
3/4
4
4/5
5
8
Number of Instructions
26
50
5
14
7
3
1
2
1
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 55
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
8.1.
INSTRUCTION SET
The instruction set of the CIP-51 System Controller is fully compatible with the standard MCS-51TM instruction set.
Standard 8051 development tools can be used to develop software for the CIP-51. All CIP-51 instructions are the
binary and functional equivalent of their MCS-51TM counterparts, including opcodes, addressing modes and effect on
PSW flags. However, instruction timing is different than that of the standard 8051.
8.1.1.
Instruction and CPU Timing
In many 8051 implementations, a distinction is made between machine cycles and clock cycles, with machine cycles
varying from 2 to 12 clock cycles in length. However, the CIP-51 implementation is based solely on clock cycle tim-
ing. All instruction timings are specified in terms of clock cycles.
Due to the pipelined architecture of the CIP-51, most instructions execute in the same number of clock cycles as there
are program bytes in the instruction. Conditional branch instructions take one less clock cycle to complete when the
branch is not taken as opposed to when the branch is taken. Table 8.1 is the CIP-51 Instruction Set Summary,
which includes the mnemonic, number of bytes, and number of clock cycles for each instruction.
8.1.2.
MOVX Instruction and Program Memory
The MOVX instruction is typically used to access external data memory (Note: the C8051F300/1/2/3/4/5 does not
support external data or program memory). In the CIP-51, the MOVX instruction accesses the on-chip program mem-
ory space implemented as re-programmable FLASH memory. This feature provides a mechanism for the CIP-51 to
update program code and use the program memory space for non-volatile data storage. Refer to
Section "10. FLASH
Memory" on page 83
for further details.
Table 8.1. CIP-51 Instruction Set Summary
Mnemonic
Description
Bytes
Clock
Cycles
ARITHMETIC OPERATIONS
ADD A, Rn
Add register to A
1
1
ADD A, direct
Add direct byte to A
2
2
ADD A, @Ri
Add indirect RAM to A
1
2
ADD A, #data
Add immediate to A
2
2
ADDC A, Rn
Add register to A with carry
1
1
ADDC A, direct
Add direct byte to A with carry
2
2
ADDC A, @Ri
Add indirect RAM to A with carry
1
2
ADDC A, #data
Add immediate to A with carry
2
2
SUBB A, Rn
Subtract register from A with borrow
1
1
SUBB A, direct
Subtract direct byte from A with borrow
2
2
SUBB A, @Ri
Subtract indirect RAM from A with borrow
1
2
SUBB A, #data
Subtract immediate from A with borrow
2
2
INC A
Increment A
1
1
INC Rn
Increment register
1
1
INC direct
Increment direct byte
2
2
INC @Ri
Increment indirect RAM
1
2
DEC A
Decrement A
1
1
DEC Rn
Decrement register
1
1
DEC direct
Decrement direct byte
2
2
DEC @Ri
Decrement indirect RAM
1
2
INC DPTR
Increment Data Pointer
1
1
Page 56
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
MUL AB
Multiply A and B
1
4
DIV AB
Divide A by B
1
8
DA A
Decimal adjust A
1
1
LOGICAL OPERATIONS
ANL A, Rn
AND Register to A
1
1
ANL A, direct
AND direct byte to A
2
2
ANL A, @Ri
AND indirect RAM to A
1
2
ANL A, #data
AND immediate to A
2
2
ANL direct, A
AND A to direct byte
2
2
ANL direct, #data
AND immediate to direct byte
3
3
ORL A, Rn
OR Register to A
1
1
ORL A, direct
OR direct byte to A
2
2
ORL A, @Ri
OR indirect RAM to A
1
2
ORL A, #data
OR immediate to A
2
2
ORL direct, A
OR A to direct byte
2
2
ORL direct, #data
OR immediate to direct byte
3
3
XRL A, Rn
Exclusive-OR Register to A
1
1
XRL A, direct
Exclusive-OR direct byte to A
2
2
XRL A, @Ri
Exclusive-OR indirect RAM to A
1
2
XRL A, #data
Exclusive-OR immediate to A
2
2
XRL direct, A
Exclusive-OR A to direct byte
2
2
XRL direct, #data
Exclusive-OR immediate to direct byte
3
3
CLR A
Clear A
1
1
CPL A
Complement A
1
1
RL A
Rotate A left
1
1
RLC A
Rotate A left through Carry
1
1
RR A
Rotate A right
1
1
RRC A
Rotate A right through Carry
1
1
SWAP A
Swap nibbles of A
1
1
DATA TRANSFER
MOV A, Rn
Move Register to A
1
1
MOV A, direct
Move direct byte to A
2
2
MOV A, @Ri
Move indirect RAM to A
1
2
MOV A, #data
Move immediate to A
2
2
MOV Rn, A
Move A to Register
1
1
MOV Rn, direct
Move direct byte to Register
2
2
MOV Rn, #data
Move immediate to Register
2
2
MOV direct, A
Move A to direct byte
2
2
MOV direct, Rn
Move Register to direct byte
2
2
MOV direct, direct
Move direct byte to direct byte
3
3
MOV direct, @Ri
Move indirect RAM to direct byte
2
2
MOV direct, #data
Move immediate to direct byte
3
3
MOV @Ri, A
Move A to indirect RAM
1
2
MOV @Ri, direct
Move direct byte to indirect RAM
2
2
MOV @Ri, #data
Move immediate to indirect RAM
2
2
Table 8.1. CIP-51 Instruction Set Summary
Mnemonic
Description
Bytes
Clock
Cycles
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 57
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
MOV DPTR, #data16
Load DPTR with 16-bit constant
3
3
MOVC A, @A+DPTR
Move code byte relative DPTR to A
1
3
MOVC A, @A+PC
Move code byte relative PC to A
1
3
MOVX A, @Ri
Move external data (8-bit address) to A
1
3
MOVX @Ri, A
Move A to external data (8-bit address)
1
3
MOVX A, @DPTR
Move external data (16-bit address) to A
1
3
MOVX @DPTR, A
Move A to external data (16-bit address)
1
3
PUSH direct
Push direct byte onto stack
2
2
POP direct
Pop direct byte from stack
2
2
XCH A, Rn
Exchange Register with A
1
1
XCH A, direct
Exchange direct byte with A
2
2
XCH A, @Ri
Exchange indirect RAM with A
1
2
XCHD A, @Ri
Exchange low nibble of indirect RAM with A
1
2
BOOLEAN MANIPULATION
CLR C
Clear Carry
1
1
CLR bit
Clear direct bit
2
2
SETB C
Set Carry
1
1
SETB bit
Set direct bit
2
2
CPL C
Complement Carry
1
1
CPL bit
Complement direct bit
2
2
ANL C, bit
AND direct bit to Carry
2
2
ANL C, /bit
AND complement of direct bit to Carry
2
2
ORL C, bit
OR direct bit to carry
2
2
ORL C, /bit
OR complement of direct bit to Carry
2
2
MOV C, bit
Move direct bit to Carry
2
2
MOV bit, C
Move Carry to direct bit
2
2
JC rel
Jump if Carry is set
2
2/3
JNC rel
Jump if Carry is not set
2
2/3
JB bit, rel
Jump if direct bit is set
3
3/4
JNB bit, rel
Jump if direct bit is not set
3
3/4
JBC bit, rel
Jump if direct bit is set and clear bit
3
3/4
PROGRAM BRANCHING
ACALL addr11
Absolute subroutine call
2
3
LCALL addr16
Long subroutine call
3
4
RET
Return from subroutine
1
5
RETI
Return from interrupt
1
5
AJMP addr11
Absolute jump
2
3
LJMP addr16
Long jump
3
4
SJMP rel
Short jump (relative address)
2
3
JMP @A+DPTR
Jump indirect relative to DPTR
1
3
JZ rel
Jump if A equals zero
2
2/3
JNZ rel
Jump if A does not equal zero
2
2/3
CJNE A, direct, rel
Compare direct byte to A and jump if not equal
3
3/4
CJNE A, #data, rel
Compare immediate to A and jump if not equal
3
3/4
CJNE Rn, #data, rel
Compare immediate to Register and jump if not equal
3
3/4
Table 8.1. CIP-51 Instruction Set Summary
Mnemonic
Description
Bytes
Clock
Cycles
Page 58
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
CJNE @Ri, #data, rel
Compare immediate to indirect and jump if not equal
3
4/5
DJNZ Rn, rel
Decrement Register and jump if not zero
2
2/3
DJNZ direct, rel
Decrement direct byte and jump if not zero
3
3/4
NOP
No operation
1
1
Table 8.1. CIP-51 Instruction Set Summary
Mnemonic
Description
Bytes
Clock
Cycles
Notes on Registers, Operands and Addressing Modes:
Rn - Register R0-R7 of the currently selected register bank.
@Ri - Data RAM location addressed indirectly through R0 or R1.
rel - 8-bit, signed (two's complement) offset relative to the first byte of the following instruction. Used by SJMP
and all conditional jumps.
direct - 8-bit internal data location's address. This could be a direct-access Data RAM location (0x00-0x7F) or an
SFR (0x80-0xFF).
#data - 8-bit constant
#data16 - 16-bit constant
bit - Direct-accessed bit in Data RAM or SFR
addr11 - 11-bit destination address used by ACALL and AJMP. The destination must be within the same 2K-byte
page of program memory as the first byte of the following instruction.
addr16 - 16-bit destination address used by LCALL and LJMP. The destination may be anywhere within the 8K-
byte program memory space.
There is one unused opcode (0xA5) that performs the same function as NOP.
All mnemonics copyrighted Intel Corporation 1980.
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 59
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
8.2.
MEMORY ORGANIZATION
The memory organization of the CIP-51 System Controller is similar to that of a standard 8051. There are two sepa-
rate memory spaces: program memory and data memory. Program and data memory share the same address space but
are accessed via different instruction types. The CIP-51 memory organization is shown in Figure 8.2 and Figure 8.3.
8.2.1.
Program Memory
The CIP-51 core has a 64k-byte program memory space. The C8051F300/1/2/3 implements 8192 bytes of this pro-
gram memory space as in-system, re-programmable FLASH memory, organized in a contiguous block from
addresses 0x0000 to 0x1FFF. Note: 512 bytes (0x1E00 - 0x1FFF) of this memory are reserved for factory use and are
not available for user program storage. The C8051F304 implements 4096 bytes of re-programmable FLASH program
memory space; the C8051F305 implements 2048 bytes of re-programmable FLASH program memory space.
Figure 8.2 shows the program memory maps for C8051F300/1/2/3/4/5 devices.
Program memory is normally assumed to be read-only. However, the CIP-51 can write to program memory by setting
the Program Store Write Enable bit (PSCTL.0) and using the MOVX instruction. This feature provides a mechanism
for the CIP-51 to update program code and use the program memory space for non-volatile data storage. Refer to
Sec-
tion "10. FLASH Memory" on page 83
for further details.
FLASH
(In-System
Programmable in 512
Byte Sectors)
0x0000
RESERVED
0x1000
0x0FFF
C8051F304
(4k FLASH)
C8051F300/1/2/3
(8k FLASH)
FLASH
(In-System
Programmable in 512
Byte Sectors)
0x0000
RESERVED
0x1E00
0x1DFF
FLASH
(In-System
Programmable in 512
Byte Sectors)
0x0000
RESERVED
0x0800
0x07FF
C8051F305
(2k FLASH)
Figure 8.2. Program Memory Maps
Page 60
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
8.2.2.
Data Memory
The CIP-51 includes 256 bytes of internal RAM mapped into the data memory space from 0x00 through 0xFF. The
lower 128 bytes of data memory are used for general purpose registers and scratch pad memory. Either direct or indi-
rect addressing may be used to access the lower 128 bytes of data memory. Locations 0x00 through 0x1F are addres-
sable as four banks of general purpose registers, each bank consisting of eight byte-wide registers. The next 16 bytes,
locations 0x20 through 0x2F, may either be addressed as bytes or as 128 bit locations accessible with the direct
addressing mode.
The upper 128 bytes of data memory are accessible only by indirect addressing. This region occupies the same
address space as the Special Function Registers (SFR) but is physically separate from the SFR space. The addressing
mode used by an instruction when accessing locations above 0x7F determines whether the CPU accesses the upper
128 bytes of data memory space or the SFRs. Instructions that use direct addressing will access the SFR space.
Instructions using indirect addressing above 0x7F access the upper 128 bytes of data memory. Figure 8.3 illustrates
the data memory organization of the CIP-51.
8.2.3.
General Purpose Registers
The lower 32 bytes of data memory, locations 0x00 through 0x1F, may be addressed as four banks of general-purpose
registers. Each bank consists of eight byte-wide registers designated R0 through R7. Only one of these banks may be
enabled at a time. Two bits in the program status word, RS0 (PSW.3) and RS1 (PSW.4), select the active register bank
(see description of the PSW in Figure 8.7). This allows fast context switching when entering subroutines and inter-
rupt service routines. Indirect addressing modes use registers R0 and R1 as index registers.
8.2.4.
Bit Addressable Locations
In addition to direct access to data memory organized as bytes, the sixteen data memory locations at 0x20 through
0x2F are also accessible as 128 individually addressable bits. Each bit has a bit address from 0x00 to 0x7F. Bit 0 of
the byte at 0x20 has bit address 0x00 while bit 7 of the byte at 0x20 has bit address 0x07. Bit 7 of the byte at 0x2F has
bit address 0x7F. A bit access is distinguished from a full byte access by the type of instruction used (bit source or
destination operands as opposed to a byte source or destination).
Figure 8.3. Data Memory Map
(Direct and Indirect
Addressing)
0x00
0x7F
Upper 128 RAM
(Indirect Addressing
Only)
0x80
0xFF
Special Function
Register's
(Direct Addressing Only)
General Purpose
Registers
0x1F
0x20
0x2F
Bit Addressable
Lower 128 RAM
(Direct and Indirect
Addressing)
0x30
INTERNAL DATA ADDRESS SPACE
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 61
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
The MCS-51TM assembly language allows an alternate notation for bit addressing of the form XX.B where XX is the
byte address and B is the bit position within the byte. For example, the instruction:
MOV
C, 22.3h
moves the Boolean value at 0x13 (bit 3 of the byte at location 0x22) into the Carry flag.
8.2.5.
Stack
A programmer's stack can be located anywhere in the 256-byte data memory. The stack area is designated using the
Stack Pointer (SP, 0x81) SFR. The SP will point to the last location used. The next value pushed on the stack is placed
at SP+1 and then SP is incremented. A reset initializes the stack pointer to location 0x07. Therefore, the first value
pushed on the stack is placed at location 0x08, which is also the first register (R0) of register bank 1. Thus, if more
than one register bank is to be used, the SP should be initialized to a location in the data memory not being used for
data storage. The stack depth can extend up to 256 bytes.
8.2.6.
Special Function Registers
The direct-access data memory locations from 0x80 to 0xFF constitute the special function registers (SFRs). The
SFRs provide control and data exchange with the CIP-51's resources and peripherals. The CIP-51 duplicates the SFRs
found in a typical 8051 implementation as well as implementing additional SFRs used to configure and access the
sub-systems unique to the MCU. This allows the addition of new functionality while retaining compatibility with the
MCS-51TM instruction set. Table 8.2 lists the SFRs implemented in the CIP-51 System Controller.
The SFR registers are accessed anytime the direct addressing mode is used to access memory locations from 0x80 to
0xFF. SFRs with addresses ending in 0x0 or 0x8 (e.g. P0, TCON, SCON0, IE, etc.) are bit-addressable as well as
byte-addressable. All other SFRs are byte-addressable only. Unoccupied addresses in the SFR space are reserved for
future use. Accessing these areas will have an indeterminate effect and should be avoided. Refer to the corresponding
pages of the datasheet, as indicated in Table 8.3, for a detailed description of each register.
Page 62
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
Table 8.3. Special Function Registers
SFRs are listed in alphabetical order. All undefined SFR locations are reserved
Register
Address
Description
Page No.
ACC
0xE0
Accumulator
66
ADC0CF
0xBC
ADC0 Configuration
39
ADC0CN
0xE8
ADC0 Control
40
ADC0GT
0xC4
ADC0 Greater-Than Compare Word
43
ADC0LT
0xC6
ADC0 Less-Than Compare Word
43
ADC0
0xBE
ADC0 Data Word
39
AMX0SL
0xBB
ADC0 Multiplexer Channel Select
38
B
0xF0
B Register
66
CKCON
0x8E
Clock Control
139
CPT0CN
0xF8
Comparator0 Control
49
CPT0MD
0x9D
Comparator0 Mode Selection
51
CPT0MX
0x9F
Comparator0 MUX Selection
50
DPH
0x83
Data Pointer High
64
DPL
0x82
Data Pointer Low
64
EIE1
0xE6
Extended Interrupt Enable 1
72
EIP1
0xF6
External Interrupt Priority 1
73
Table 8.2. Special Function Register (SFR) Memory Map
F8
CPT0CN
PCA0L
PCA0H
PCA0CPL0 PCA0CPH0
F0
B
P0MDIN
EIP1
E8
ADC0CN
PCA0CPL1 PCA0CPH1 PCA0CPL2 PCA0CPH2
RSTSRC
E0
ACC
XBR0
XBR1
XBR2
IT01CF
EIE1
D8
PCA0CN
PCA0MD
PCA0CPM0 PCA0CPM1 PCA0CPM2
D0
PSW
REF0CN
C8
TMR2CN
TMR2RLL TMR2RLH
TMR2L
TMR2H
C0
SMB0CN
SMB0CF
SMB0DAT
ADC0GT
ADC0LT
B8
IP
AMX0SL
ADC0CF
ADC0
B0
OSCXCN
OSCICN
OSCICL
FLSCL
FLKEY
A8
IE
A0
P0MDOUT
98
SCON0
SBUF0
CPT0MD
CPT0MX
90
88
TCON
TMOD
TL0
TL1
TH0
TH1
CKCON
PSCTL
80
P0
SP
DPL
DPH
PCON
0(8)
1(9)
2(A)
3(B)
4(C)
5(D)
6(E)
7(F)
(bit addressable)
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 63
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
Register
Address
Description
Page
FLKEY
0xB7
FLASH Lock and Key
87
FLSCL
0xB6
FLASH Scale
87
IE
0xA8
Interrupt Enable
70
IP
0xB8
Interrupt Priority
71
IT01CF
0xE4
INT0/INT1 Configuration Register
74
OSCICL
0xB3
Internal Oscillator Calibration
90
OSCICN
0xB2
Internal Oscillator Control
90
OSCXCN
0xB1
External Oscillator Control
92
P0
0x80
Port 0 Latch
101
P0MDIN
0xF1
Port 0 Input Mode Configuration
101
P0MDOUT
0xA4
Port 0 Output Mode Configuration
102
PCA0CN
0xD8
PCA Control
156
PCA0MD
0xD9
PCA Mode
157
PCA0CPH0
0xFC
PCA Capture 0 High
160
PCA0CPH1
0xEA
PCA Capture 1 High
160
PCA0CPH2
0xEC
PCA Capture 2 High
160
PCA0CPL0
0xFB
PCA Capture 0 Low
160
PCA0CPL1
0xE9
PCA Capture 1 Low
160
PCA0CPL2
0xEB
PCA Capture 2 Low
160
PCA0CPM0
0xDA
PCA Module 0 Mode Register
158
PCA0CPM1
0xDB
PCA Module 1 Mode Register
158
PCA0CPM2
0xDC
PCA Module 2 Mode Register
158
PCA0H
0xFA
PCA Counter High
159
PCA0L
0xF9
PCA Counter Low
159
PCON
0x87
Power Control
76
PSCTL
0x8F
Program Store R/W Control
86
PSW
0xD0
Program Status Word
65
REF0CN
0xD1
Voltage Reference Control
45
RSTSRC
0xEF
Reset Source Configuration/Status
81
SBUF0
0x99
UART 0 Data Buffer
129
SCON0
0x98
UART 0 Control
128
SMB0CF
0xC1
SMBus Configuration
110
SMB0CN
0xC0
SMBus Control
112
SMB0DAT
0xC2
SMBus Data
114
SP
0x81
Stack Pointer
65
TMR2CN
0xC8
Timer/Counter 2 Control
143
TCON
0x88
Timer/Counter Control
137
TH0
0x8C
Timer/Counter 0 High
140
TH1
0x8D
Timer/Counter 1 High
140
TL0
0x8A
Timer/Counter 0 Low
140
TL1
0x8B
Timer/Counter 1 Low
140
TMOD
0x89
Timer/Counter Mode
138
TMR2RLH
0xCB
Timer/Counter 2 Reload High
144
TMR2RLL
0xCA
Timer/Counter 2 Reload Low
144
TMR2H
0xCD
Timer/Counter 2 High
144
TMR2L
0xCC
Timer/Counter 2 Low
144
Table 8.3. Special Function Registers
Page 64
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
8.2.7.
Register Descriptions
Following are descriptions of SFRs related to the operation of the CIP-51 System Controller. Reserved bits should not
be set to logic l. Future product versions may use these bits to implement new features in which case the reset value
of the bit will be logic 0, selecting the feature's default state. Detailed descriptions of the remaining SFRs are included
in the sections of the datasheet associated with their corresponding system function.
Register
Address
Description
Page
XBR0
0xE1
Port I/O Crossbar Control 0
99
XBR1
0xE2
Port I/O Crossbar Control 1
99
XBR2
0xE3
Port I/O Crossbar Control 2
100
0x97, 0xAE, 0xAF, 0xB4,
0xB6, 0xBF, 0xCE, 0xD2,
0xD3, 0xD4, 0xD5, 0xD6,
0xD7, 0xDD, 0xDE, 0xDF,
0xF5
Reserved
Table 8.3. Special Function Registers
Figure 8.4. DPL: Data Pointer Low Byte
Bits7-0:
DPL: Data Pointer Low.
The DPL register is the low byte of the 16-bit DPTR. DPTR is used to access indirectly addressed
FLASH memory.
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address:
0x82
Figure 8.5. DPH: Data Pointer High Byte
Bits7-0:
DPH: Data Pointer High.
The DPH register is the high byte of the 16-bit DPTR. DPTR is used to access indirectly addressed
FLASH memory.
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address:
0x83
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 65
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
Figure 8.6. SP: Stack Pointer
Bits7-0:
SP: Stack Pointer.
The Stack Pointer holds the location of the top of the stack. The stack pointer is incremented before
every PUSH operation. The SP register defaults to 0x07 after reset.
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
00000111
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address:
0x81
Figure 8.7. PSW: Program Status Word
Bit7:
CY: Carry Flag.
This bit is set when the last arithmetic operation resulted in a carry (addition) or a borrow (subtrac-
tion). It is cleared to logic 0 by all other arithmetic operations.
Bit6:
AC: Auxiliary Carry Flag
This bit is set when the last arithmetic operation resulted in a carry into (addition) or a borrow from
(subtraction) the high order nibble. It is cleared to logic 0 by all other arithmetic operations.
Bit5:
F0: User Flag 0.
This is a bit-addressable, general purpose flag for use under software control.
Bits4-3:
RS1-RS0: Register Bank Select.
These bits select which register bank is used during register accesses.
Bit2:
OV: Overflow Flag.
This bit is set to logic 1 if the last arithmetic operation resulted in a carry (addition), borrow (subtrac-
tion), or overflow (multiply or divide). It is cleared to logic 0 by all other arithmetic operations.
Bit1:
F1: User Flag 1.
This is a bit-addressable, general purpose flag for use under software control.
Bit0:
PARITY: Parity Flag.
This bit is set to logic 1 if the sum of the eight bits in the accumulator is odd and cleared if the sum is
even.
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
Reset Value
CY
AC
F0
RS1
RS0
OV
F1
PARITY
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address:
(bit addressable)
0xD0
RS1
RS0
Register Bank
Address
0
0
0
0x00 - 0x07
0
1
1
0x08 - 0x0F
1
0
2
0x10 - 0x17
1
1
3
0x18 - 0x1F
Page 66
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
Figure 8.8. ACC: Accumulator
Bits7-0:
ACC: Accumulator.
This register is the accumulator for arithmetic operations.
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
ACC.7
ACC.6
ACC.5
ACC.4
ACC.3
ACC.2
ACC.1
ACC.0
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address:
(bit addressable)
0xE0
Figure 8.9. B: B Register
Bits7-0:
B: B Register.
This register serves as a second accumulator for certain arithmetic operations.
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
B.7
B.6
B.5
B.4
B.3
B.2
B.1
B.0
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address:
(bit addressable)
0xF0
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 67
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
8.3.
Interrupt Handler
The CIP-51 includes an extended interrupt system supporting a total of 12 interrupt sources with two priority levels.
The allocation of interrupt sources between on-chip peripherals and external inputs pins varies according to the spe-
cific version of the device. Each interrupt source has one or more associated interrupt-pending flag(s) located in an
SFR. When a peripheral or external source meets a valid interrupt condition, the associated interrupt-pending flag is
set to logic 1.
If interrupts are enabled for the source, an interrupt request is generated when the interrupt-pending flag is set. As
soon as execution of the current instruction is complete, the CPU generates an LCALL to a predetermined address to
begin execution of an interrupt service routine (ISR). Each ISR must end with an RETI instruction, which returns pro-
gram execution to the next instruction that would have been executed if the interrupt request had not occurred. If
interrupts are not enabled, the interrupt-pending flag is ignored by the hardware and program execution continues as
normal. (The interrupt-pending flag is set to logic 1 regardless of the interrupt's enable/disable state.)
Each interrupt source can be individually enabled or disabled through the use of an associated interrupt enable bit in
an SFR (IE-EIE1). However, interrupts must first be globally enabled by setting the EA bit (IE.7) to logic 1 before the
individual interrupt enables are recognized. Setting the EA bit to logic 0 disables all interrupt sources regardless of
the individual interrupt-enable settings.
Some interrupt-pending flags are automatically cleared by the hardware when the CPU vectors to the ISR. However,
most are not cleared by the hardware and must be cleared by software before returning from the ISR. If an interrupt-
pending flag remains set after the CPU completes the return-from-interrupt (RETI) instruction, a new interrupt
request will be generated immediately and the CPU will re-enter the ISR after the completion of the next instruction.
8.3.1.
MCU Interrupt Sources and Vectors
The MCUs support 12 interrupt sources. Software can simulate an interrupt by setting any interrupt-pending flag to
logic 1. If interrupts are enabled for the flag, an interrupt request will be generated and the CPU will vector to the ISR
address associated with the interrupt-pending flag. MCU interrupt sources, associated vector addresses, priority order
and control bits are summarized in Table 8.4 on page 69. Refer to the datasheet section associated with a particular
on-chip peripheral for information regarding valid interrupt conditions for the peripheral and the behavior of its inter-
rupt-pending flag(s).
Page 68
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
8.3.2.
External Interrupts
The /INT0 and /INT1 external interrupt sources are configurable as active high or low, edge or level sensitive. The
IN0PL (/INT0 Polarity) and IN1PL (/INT1 Polarity) bits in the IT01CF register select active high or active low; the
IT0 and IT1 bits in TCON (
Section "15.1. Timer 0 and Timer 1" on page 133
) select level or edge sensitive. The
table below lists the possible configurations.
/INT0 and /INT1 are assigned to Port pins as defined in the IT01CF register (see Figure 8.14). Note that /INT0 and
/INT0 Port pin assignments are independent of any Crossbar assignments. /INT0 and /INT1 will monitor their
assigned Port pins without disturbing the peripheral that was assigned the Port pin via the Crossbar. To assign a Port
pin only to /INT0 and/or /INT1, configure the Crossbar to skip the selected pin(s). This is accomplished by setting the
associated bit in register XBR0 (see
Section "12.1. Priority Crossbar Decoder" on page 96
for complete details on
configuring the Crossbar).
IE0 (TCON.1) and IE1 (TCON.3) serve as the interrupt-pending flags for the /INT0 and /INT1 external interrupts,
respectively. If an /INT0 or /INT1 external interrupt is configured as edge-sensitive, the corresponding interrupt-
pending flag is automatically cleared by the hardware when the CPU vectors to the ISR. When configured as level
sensitive, the interrupt-pending flag remains logic 1 while the input is active as defined by the corresponding polarity
bit (IN0PL or IN1PL); the flag remains logic 0 while the input is inactive. The external interrupt source must hold the
input active until the interrupt request is recognized. It must then deactivate the interrupt request before execution of
the ISR completes or another interrupt request will be generated.
8.3.3.
Interrupt Priorities
Each interrupt source can be individually programmed to one of two priority levels: low or high. A low priority inter-
rupt service routine can be preempted by a high priority interrupt. A high priority interrupt cannot be preempted. Each
interrupt has an associated interrupt priority bit in an SFR (IP or EIP1) used to configure its priority level. Low prior-
ity is the default. If two interrupts are recognized simultaneously, the interrupt with the higher priority is serviced
first. If both interrupts have the same priority level, a fixed priority order is used to arbitrate, given in Table 8.4.
8.3.4.
Interrupt Latency
Interrupt response time depends on the state of the CPU when the interrupt occurs. Pending interrupts are sampled
and priority decoded each system clock cycle. Therefore, the fastest possible response time is 5 system clock cycles:
1 clock cycle to detect the interrupt and 4 clock cycles to complete the LCALL to the ISR. If an interrupt is pending
when a RETI is executed, a single instruction is executed before an LCALL is made to service the pending interrupt.
Therefore, the maximum response time for an interrupt (when no other interrupt is currently being serviced or the
new interrupt is of greater priority) occurs when the CPU is performing an RETI instruction followed by a DIV as the
next instruction. In this case, the response time is 18 system clock cycles: 1 clock cycle to detect the interrupt, 5 clock
cycles to execute the RETI, 8 clock cycles to complete the DIV instruction and 4 clock cycles to execute the LCALL
to the ISR. If the CPU is executing an ISR for an interrupt with equal or higher priority, the new interrupt will not be
serviced until the current ISR completes, including the RETI and following instruction.
IT0
IN0PL
/INT0 Interrupt
IT1
IN1PL
/INT1 Interrupt
1
0
Active low, edge sensitive
1
0
Active low, edge sensitive
1
1
Active high, edge sensitive
1
1
Active high, edge sensitive
0
0
Active low, level sensitive
0
0
Active low, level sensitive
0
1
Active high, level sensitive
0
1
Active high, level sensitive
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 69
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
Table 8.4. Interrupt Summary
Interrupt Source
Interrupt
Vector
Priority
Order
Pending Flag
Bi
t
a
d
d
r
e
s
s
a
b
l
e
?
Cl
ea
r
e
d
b
y
H
W
?
Enable
Flag
Priority
Control
Reset
0x0000
Top
None
N/A
N/A
Always
Enabled
Always
Highest
External Interrupt 0 (/INT0)
0x0003
0
IE0 (TCON.1)
Y
Y
EX0 (IE.0)
PX0 (IP.0)
Timer 0 Overflow
0x000B
1
TF0 (TCON.5)
Y
Y
ET0 (IE.1)
PT0 (IP.1)
External Interrupt 1 (/INT1)
0x0013
2
IE1 (TCON.3)
Y
Y
EX1 (IE.2)
PX1 (IP.2)
Timer 1 Overflow
0x001B
3
TF1 (TCON.7)
Y
Y
ET1 (IE.3)
PT1 (IP.3)
UART0
0x0023
4
RI0 (SCON0.0)
TI0 (SCON0.1)
Y
N
ES0 (IE.4)
PS0 (IP.4)
Timer 2 Overflow
0x002B
5
TF2H
(TMR2CN.7)
TF2L
(TMR2CN.6)
Y
N
ET2 (IE.5)
PT2 (IP.5)
SMBus Interface
0x0033
6
SI (SMB0CN.0)
Y
N
ESMB0
(EIE1.0)
PSMB0
(EIP1.0)
ADC0 Window Compare
0x003B
7
AD0WINT
(ADC0CN.3)
Y
N
EWADC0
(EIE1.1)
PWADC0
(EIP1.1)
ADC0 Conversion Complete
0x0043
8
AD0INT
(ADC0CN.5)
Y
N
EADC0C
(EIE1.2)
PADC0C
(EIP1.2)
Programmable Counter Array
0x004B
9
CF (PCA0CN.7)
CCFn
(PCA0CN.n)
Y
N
EPCA0
(EIE1.3)
PPCA0
(EIP1.3)
Comparator0 Falling Edge
0x0053
10
CP0FIF
(CPT0CN.4)
N
N
ECP0F
(EIE1.4)
PCP0F
(EIP1.4)
Comparator0 Rising Edge
0x005B
11
CP0RIF
(CPT0CN.5)
N
N
ECP0R
(EIE1.5)
PCP0R
(EIP1.5)
Page 70
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
8.3.5.
Interrupt Register Descriptions
The SFRs used to enable the interrupt sources and set their priority level are described below. Refer to the datasheet
section associated with a particular on-chip peripheral for information regarding valid interrupt conditions for the
peripheral and the behavior of its interrupt-pending flag(s).
Figure 8.10. IE: Interrupt Enable
Bit7:
EA: Enable All Interrupts.
This bit globally enables/disables all interrupts. It overrides the individual interrupt mask settings.
0: Disable all interrupt sources.
1: Enable each interrupt according to its individual mask setting.
Bit6:
IEGF0: General Purpose Flag 0.
This is a general purpose flag for use under software control.
Bit5:
ET2: Enable Timer 2 Interrupt.
This bit sets the masking of the Timer 2 interrupt.
0: Disable Timer 2 interrupt.
1: Enable interrupt requests generated by the TF2L or TF2H flags.
Bit4:
ES0: Enable UART0 Interrupt.
This bit sets the masking of the UART0 interrupt.
0: Disable UART0 interrupt.
1: Enable UART0 interrupt.
Bit3:
ET1: Enable Timer 1 Interrupt.
This bit sets the masking of the Timer 1 interrupt.
0: Disable all Timer 1 interrupt.
1: Enable interrupt requests generated by the TF1 flag.
Bit2:
EX1: Enable External Interrupt 1.
This bit sets the masking of external interrupt 1.
0: Disable external interrupt 1.
1: Enable interrupt requests generated by the /INT1 input.
Bit1:
ET0: Enable Timer 0 Interrupt.
This bit sets the masking of the Timer 0 interrupt.
0: Disable all Timer 0 interrupt.
1: Enable interrupt requests generated by the TF0 flag.
Bit0:
EX0: Enable External Interrupt 0.
This bit sets the masking of external interrupt 0.
0: Disable external interrupt 0.
1: Enable interrupt requests generated by the /INT0 input.
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
EA
IEGF0
ET2
ES0
ET1
EX1
ET0
EX0
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address:
(bit addressable)
0xA8
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 71
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
Figure 8.11. IP: Interrupt Priority
Bits7-6:
UNUSED. Read = 11b, Write = don't care.
Bit5:
PT2: Timer 2 Interrupt Priority Control.
This bit sets the priority of the Timer 2 interrupt.
0: Timer 2 interrupt priority determined by default priority order.
1: Timer 2 interrupts set to high priority level.
Bit4:
PS0: UART0 Interrupt Priority Control.
This bit sets the priority of the UART0 interrupt.
0: UART0 interrupt priority determined by default priority order.
1: UART0 interrupts set to high priority level.
Bit3:
PT1: Timer 1 Interrupt Priority Control.
This bit sets the priority of the Timer 1 interrupt.
0: Timer 1 interrupt priority determined by default priority order.
1: Timer 1 interrupts set to high priority level.
Bit2:
PX1: External Interrupt 1 Priority Control.
This bit sets the priority of the External Interrupt 1 interrupt.
0: External Interrupt 1 priority determined by default priority order.
1: External Interrupt 1 set to high priority level.
Bit1:
PT0: Timer 0 Interrupt Priority Control.
This bit sets the priority of the Timer 0 interrupt.
0: Timer 0 interrupt priority determined by default priority order.
1: Timer 0 interrupt set to high priority level.
Bit0:
PX0: External Interrupt 0 Priority Control.
This bit sets the priority of the External Interrupt 0 interrupt.
0: External Interrupt 0 priority determined by default priority order.
1: External Interrupt 0 set to high priority level.
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
-
-
PT2
PS0
PT1
PX1
PT0
PX0
11000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address:
(bit addressable)
0xB8
Page 72
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
Figure 8.12. EIE1: Extended Interrupt Enable 1
Bits7-6:
UNUSED. Read = 00b. Write = don't care.
Bit5:
ECP0R: Enable Comparator0 (CP0) Rising Edge Interrupt.
This bit sets the masking of the CP0 Rising Edge interrupt.
0: Disable CP0 Rising Edge interrupt.
1: Enable interrupt requests generated by the CP0RIF flag.
Bit4:
ECP0F: Enable Comparator0 (CP0) Falling Edge Interrupt.
This bit sets the masking of the CP0 Falling Edge interrupt.
0: Disable CP0 Falling Edge interrupt.
1: Enable interrupt requests generated by the CP0FIF flag .
Bit3:
EPCA0: Enable Programmable Counter Array (PCA0) Interrupt.
This bit sets the masking of the PCA0 interrupts.
0: Disable all PCA0 interrupts.
1: Enable interrupt requests generated by PCA0.
Bit2:
EADC0C: Enable ADC0 Conversion Complete Interrupt.
This bit sets the masking of the ADC0 Conversion Complete interrupt.
0: Disable ADC0 Conversion Complete interrupt.
1: Enable interrupt requests generated by the AD0INT flag.
Bit1:
EWADC0: Enable Window Comparison ADC0 Interrupt.
This bit sets the masking of ADC0 Window Comparison interrupt.
0: Disable ADC0 Window Comparison interrupt.
1: Enable interrupt requests generated by ADC0 Window Compare flag.
Bit0:
ESMB0: Enable SMBus Interrupt.
This bit sets the masking of the SMBus interrupt.
0: Disable all SMBus interrupts.
1: Enable interrupt requests generated by the SI flag.
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
-
-
ECP0R
ECP0F
EPCA0
EADC0C
EWADC0
ESMB0
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address:
0xE6
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 73
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
Figure 8.13. EIP1: Extended Interrupt Priority 1
Bits7-6:
UNUSED. Read = 11b. Write = don't care.
Bit5:
PCP0R: Comparator0 (CP0) Rising Interrupt Priority Control.
This bit sets the priority of the CP0 rising-edge interrupt.
0: CP0 rising interrupt set to low priority level.
1: CP0 rising interrupt set to high priority level.
Bit4:
PCP0F: Comparator0 (CP0) Falling Interrupt Priority Control.
This bit sets the priority of the CP0 falling-edge interrupt.
0: CP0 falling interrupt set to low priority level.
1: CP0 falling interrupt set to high priority level.
Bit3:
PPCA0: Programmable Counter Array (PCA0) Interrupt Priority Control.
This bit sets the priority of the PCA0 interrupt.
0: PCA0 interrupt set to low priority level.
1: PCA0 interrupt set to high priority level.
Bit2:
PADC0C ADC0 Conversion Complete Interrupt Priority Control
This bit sets the priority of the ADC0 Conversion Complete interrupt.
0: ADC0 Conversion Complete interrupt set to low priority level.
1: ADC0 Conversion Complete interrupt set to high priority level.
Bit1:
PWADC0: ADC0 Window Comparator Interrupt Priority Control.
This bit sets the priority of the ADC0 Window interrupt.
0: ADC0 Window interrupt set to low priority level.
1: ADC0 Window interrupt set to high priority level.
Bit0:
PSMB0: SMBus Interrupt Priority Control.
This bit sets the priority of the SMBus interrupt.
0: SMBus interrupt set to low priority level.
1: SMBus interrupt set to high priority level.
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
-
-
PCP0R
PCP0F
PPCA0
PADC0C
PWADC0
PSMB0
11000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address:
0xF6
Page 74
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
Bit7:
IN1PL: /INT1 Polarity
0: /INT1 input is active low.
1: /INT1 input is active high.
Bits6-4:
IN1SL2-0: /INT1 Port Pin Selection Bits
These bits select which Port pin is assigned to /INT1. Note that this pin assignment is independent of
the Crossbar; /INT1 will monitor the assigned Port pin without disturbing the peripheral that has been
assigned the Port pin via the Crossbar. The Crossbar will not assign the Port pin to a peripheral if it is
configured to skip the selected pin (accomplished by setting to `1' the corresponding bit in register
XBR0).
Bit3:
IN0PL: /INT0 Polarity
0: /INT0 interrupt is active low.
1: /INT0 interrupt is active high.
Bits2-0:
INT0SL2-0: /INT0 Port Pin Selection Bits
These bits select which Port pin is assigned to /INT0. Note that this pin assignment is independent of
the Crossbar. /INT0 will monitor the assigned Port pin without disturbing the peripheral that has been
assigned the Port pin via the Crossbar. The Crossbar will not assign the Port pin to a peripheral if it is
configured to skip the selected pin (accomplished by setting to `1' the corresponding bit in register
XBR0).
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
IN1PL
IN1SL2
IN1SL1
IN1SL0
IN0PL
IN0SL2
IN0SL1
IN0SL0
00000001
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address:
0xE4
Note: Refer to Figure 15.4 for INT0/1 edge- or level-sensitive interrupt selection.
IN1SL2-0
/INT1 Port Pin
000
P0.0
001
P0.1
010
P0.2
011
P0.3
100
P0.4
101
P0.5
110
P0.6
111
P0.7
IN0SL2-0
/INT0 Port Pin
000
P0.0
001
P0.1
010
P0.2
011
P0.3
100
P0.4
101
P0.5
110
P0.6
111
P0.7
Figure 8.14. IT01CF: INT0/INT1 Configuration Register
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 75
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
8.4.
Power Management Modes
The CIP-51 core has two software programmable power management modes: Idle and Stop. Idle mode halts the CPU
while leaving the peripherals and clocks active. In Stop mode, the CPU is halted, all interrupts and timers (except the
Missing Clock Detector) are inactive, and the system clock is stopped (analog peripherals remain in their selected
states). Since clocks are running in Idle mode, power consumption is dependent upon the system clock frequency and
the number of peripherals left in active mode before entering Idle. Stop mode consumes the least power. Figure 1.15
describes the Power Control Register (PCON) used to control the CIP-51's power management modes.
Although the CIP-51 has Idle and Stop modes built in (as with any standard 8051 architecture), power management
of the entire MCU is better accomplished by enabling/disabling individual peripherals as needed. Each analog periph-
eral can be disabled when not in use and placed in low power mode. Digital peripherals, such as timers or serial
buses, draw little power when they are not in use. Turning off the oscillators lowers power consuption considerably;
however a reset is required to restart the MCU.
8.4.1.
Idle Mode
Setting the Idle Mode Select bit (PCON.0) causes the CIP-51 to halt the CPU and enter Idle mode as soon as the
instruction that sets the bit completes execution. All internal registers and memory maintain their original data. All
analog and digital peripherals can remain active during Idle mode.
Idle mode is terminated when an enabled interrupt is asserted or a reset occurs. The assertion of an enabled interrupt
will cause the Idle Mode Selection bit (PCON.0) to be cleared and the CPU to resume operation. The pending inter-
rupt will be serviced and the next instruction to be executed after the return from interrupt (RETI) will be the instruc-
tion immediately following the one that set the Idle Mode Select bit. If Idle mode is terminated by an internal or
external reset, the CIP-51 performs a normal reset sequence and begins program execution at address 0x0000.
If enabled, the Watchdog Timer (WDT) will eventually cause an internal watchdog reset and thereby terminate the
Idle mode. This feature protects the system from an unintended permanent shutdown in the event of an inadvertent
write to the PCON register. If this behavior is not desired, the WDT may be disabled by software prior to entering the
Idle mode if the WDT was initially configured to allow this operation. This provides the opportunity for additional
power savings, allowing the system to remain in the Idle mode indefinitely, waiting for an external stimulus to wake
up the system. Refer to
Section "16.3. Watchdog Timer Mode" on page 154
for more information on the use and
configuration of the WDT.
8.4.2.
Stop Mode
Setting the Stop Mode Select bit (PCON.1) causes the CIP-51 to enter Stop mode as soon as the instruction that sets
the bit completes execution.
In Stop mode the internal oscillator, CPU, and all digital peripherals are stopped; the
state of the external oscillator circuit is not affected. Each analog peripheral (including the external oscillator circuit)
may be shut down individually prior to entering Stop Mode. Stop mode can only be terminated by an internal or
external reset. On reset, the CIP-51 performs the normal reset sequence and begins program execution at address
0x0000.
If enabled, the Missing Clock Detector will cause an internal reset and thereby terminate the Stop mode. The Missing
Clock Detector should be disabled if the CPU is to be put to in STOP mode for longer than the MCD timeout of
100 sec.
Page 76
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
Bits7-2:
GF5-GF0: General Purpose Flags 5-0.
These are general purpose flags for use under software control.
Bit1:
STOP: Stop Mode Select.
Setting this bit will place the CIP-51 in Stop mode. This bit will always be read as 0.
1: CPU goes into Stop mode (turns off internal oscillator).
Bit0:
IDLE: Idle Mode Select.
Setting this bit will place the CIP-51 in Idle mode. This bit will always be read as 0.
1: CPU goes into Idle mode (shuts off clock to CPU, but clock to Timers, Interrupts, Serial Ports, and
Analog Peripherals are still active).
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
GF5
GF4
GF3
GF2
GF1
GF0
STOP
IDLE
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address:
0x87
Figure 8.15. PCON: Power Control Register
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 77
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
9.
RESET SOURCES
Reset circuitry allows the controller to be easily placed in a predefined default condition. On entry to this reset state,
the following occur:
CIP-51 halts program execution
Special Function Registers (SFRs) are initialized to their defined reset values
External Port pins are forced to a known state
Interrupts and timers are disabled.
All SFRs are reset to the predefined values noted in the SFR detailed descriptions. The contents of internal data mem-
ory are unaffected during a reset; any previously stored data is preserved. However, since the stack pointer SFR is
reset, the stack is effectively lost even though the data on the stack is not altered.
The Port I/O latches are reset to 0xFF (all logic ones) in open-drain mode. Weak pull-ups are enabled during and after
the reset. For VDD Monitor and power-on resets, the /RST pin is driven low until the device exits the reset state.
On exit from the reset state, the program counter (PC) is reset, and the system clock defaults to the internal oscillator.
Refer to
Section "11. Oscillators" on page 89
for information on selecting and configuring the system clock source.
The Watchdog Timer is enabled with the system clock divided by 12 as its clock source (
Section "16.3. Watchdog
Timer Mode" on page 154
details the use of the Watchdog Timer). Once the system clock source is stable, program
execution begins at location 0x0000.
PCA
WDT
Missing
Clock
Detector
(one-
shot)
(Software Reset)
System Reset
Reset
Funnel
P0.x
P0.y
EN
SWRSF
Internal
Oscillator
System
Clock
CIP-51
Microcontroller
Core
Extended Interrupt
Handler
Clock Select
EN
WD
T
Enable
MC
D
Enable
XTAL1
XTAL2
External
Oscillator
Drive
Illegal
FLASH
Operation
+
-
Comparator 0
C0RSEF
/RST
(wired-OR)
Power On
Reset
+
-
VDD
Supply
Monitor
Enable
'0'
Figure 9.1. Reset Sources
Page 78
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
9.1.
Power-On Reset
During power-up, the device is held in a reset state and the /RST pin is driven low until VDD settles above V
RST
. A
delay occurs before the device is released from reset; the delay decreases as the VDD ramp time increases (VDD
ramp time is defined as how fast VDD ramps from 0 V to 2.7 V). Figure 9.2. plots the power-on and VDD monitor
reset timing. The maximum VDD ramp time is 1 ms; slower ramp times may cause the device to be released from
reset before VDD reaches the V
RST
level. For ramp times less than 1 ms, the power-on reset delay (T
PORDelay
) is typ-
ically less than 0.3 ms.
On exit from a power-on reset, the PORSF flag (RSTSRC.1) is set by hardware to logic 1. When PORSF is set, all of
the other reset flags in the RSTSRC Register are indeterminate (PORSF is cleared by all other resets). Since all resets
cause program execution to begin at the same location (0x0000) software can read the PORSF flag to determine if a
power-up was the cause of reset. The content of internal data memory should be assumed to be undefined after a
power-on reset. The VDD monitor is disabled following a power-on reset.
9.2.
Power-Fail Reset / VDD Monitor
When a power-down transition or power irregularity causes VDD to drop below V
RST
, the power supply monitor will
drive the /RST pin low and hold the CIP-51 in a reset state (see Figure 9.2). When VDD returns to a level above
V
RST
, the CIP-51 will be released from the reset state. Note that even though internal data memory contents are not
altered by the power-fail reset, it is impossible to determine if VDD dropped below the level required for data reten-
tion. If the PORSF flag reads `1', the data may no longer be valid. The VDD monitor is disabled after power-on
resets; however its defined state (enabled/disabled) is not altered by any other reset source. For example, if the VDD
monitor is enabled and a software reset is performed, the VDD monitor will still be enabled after the reset. The VDD
monitor is enabled by writing a `1' to the PORSF bit in register RSTSRC. See Figure 9.2 for VDD monitor timing;
note that the reset delay is not incurred after a VDD monitor reset. See Table 9.2 for electrical characteristics of the
VDD monitor.
Power-On
Reset
VDD
Monitor
Reset
/RST
t
vo
l
t
s
1.0
2.0
Logic HIGH
Logic LOW
T
PORDelay
V
D
D
2.70
2.55
V
RST
VDD
Figure 9.2. Power-On and VDD Monitor Reset Timing
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 79
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
Important Note: Enabling the VDD monitor will immediately generate a system reset. The device will then return
from the reset state with the VDD monitor enabled. Writing a logic `1' to the PORSF flag when the VDD monitor
is enabled does not cause a system reset.
9.3.
External Reset
The external /RST pin provides a means for external circuitry to force the device into a reset state. Asserting an
active-low signal on the /RST pin generates a reset; an external pull-up and/or decoupling of the /RST pin may be
necessary to avoid erroneous noise-induced resets. See Table 9.2 for complete /RST pin specifications. The PINRSF
flag (RSTSRC.0) is set on exit from an external reset.
9.4.
Missing Clock Detector Reset
The Missing Clock Detector (MCD) is a one-shot circuit that is triggered by the system clock. If the system clock
remains high or low for more than 100 s, the one-shot will time out and generate a reset. After a MCD reset, the
MCDRSF flag (RSTSRC.2) will read `1', signifying the MCD as the reset source; otherwise, this bit reads `0'. Writ-
ing a `1' to the MCDRSF bit enables the Missing Clock Detector; writing a `0' disables it. The state of the /RST pin
is unaffected by this reset.
9.5.
Comparator0 Reset
Comparator0 can be configured as a reset source by writing a `1' to the C0RSEF flag (RSTSRC.5). Comparator0
should be enabled and allowed to settle prior to writing to C0RSEF to prevent any turn-on chatter on the output from
generating an unwanted reset. The Comparator0 reset is active-low: if the non-inverting input voltage (on CP0+) is
less than the inverting input voltage (on CP0-), the device is put into the reset state. After a Comparator0 reset, the
C0RSEF flag (RSTSRC.5) will read `1' signifying Comparator0 as the reset source; otherwise, this bit reads `0'. The
state of the /RST pin is unaffected by this reset.
9.6.
PCA Watchdog Timer Reset
The programmable Watchdog Timer (WDT) function of the Programmable Counter Array (PCA) can be used to pre-
vent software from running out of control during a system malfunction. The PCA WDT function can be enabled or
disabled by software as described in
Section "16.3. Watchdog Timer Mode" on page 154
; the WDT is enabled and
clocked by SYSCLK / 12 following any reset. If a system malfunction prevents user software from updating the
WDT, a reset is generated and the WDTRSF bit (RSTSRC.5) is set to `1'. The state of the /RST pin is unaffected by
this reset.
9.7.
FLASH Error Reset
If a FLASH read/write/erase or program read targets an illegal address, a system reset is generated. This may occur
due to any of the following:
A FLASH write or erase is attempted above user code space. This occurs when PSWE is set to `1' and a MOVX
operation is attempted above the user code space address limit.
A FLASH read is attempted above user code space. This occurs when a MOVC operation is attempted above the
user code space address limit.
A Program read is attempted above user code space. This occurs when user code attempts to branch to an address
above the user code space address limit.
Table 9.1. User Code Space Address Limits
Device
User Code Space Address Limit
C8051F300/1/2/3
0x1DFF
C8051F304
0x0FFF
Page 80
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
The FERROR bit (RSTSRC.6) is set following a FLASH error reset. The state of the /RST pin is unaffected by this
reset.
9.8.
Software Reset
Software may force a reset by writing a `1' to the SWRSF bit (RSTSRC.4). The SWRSF bit will read `1' following a
software forced reset. The state of the /RST pin is unaffected by this reset.
C8051F305
0x07FF
Table 9.2. Reset Electrical Characteristics
-40C to +85C unless otherwise specified.
PARAMETER
CONDITIONS
MIN
TYP
MAX
UNITS
/RST Output Low Voltage
I
OL
= 8.5 mA, VDD = 2.7 V to 3.6 V
0.6
V
/RST Input High Voltage
0.7 x
VDD
V
/RST Input Low Voltage
0.3 x
VDD
/RST Input Leakage Current
/RST = 0.0 V
25
40
A
VDD POR Threshold (V
RST
)
2.40
2.55
2.70
V
Missing Clock Detector Timeout
Time from last system clock rising
edge to reset initiation
100
220
500
s
Reset Time Delay
Delay between release of any reset
source and code execution at location
0x0000
5.0
s
Minimum /RST Low Time to
Generate a System Reset
15
s
Table 9.1. User Code Space Address Limits
Device
User Code Space Address Limit
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 81
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
Figure 9.3. RSTSRC: Reset Source Register
(Note: Do not use read-modify-write operations (ORL, ANL) on this register)
Bit7:
UNUSED. Read = 0. Write = don't care.
Bit6:
FERROR: FLASH Error Indicator.
0: Source of last reset was not a FLASH read/write/erase error.
1: Source of last reset was a FLASH read/write/erase error.
Bit5:
C0RSEF: Comparator0 Reset Enable and Flag.
Write
0: Comparator0 is not a reset source.
1: Comparator0 is a reset source (active-low).
Read
0: Source of last reset was not Comparator0.
1: Source of last reset was Comparator0.
Bit4:
SWRSF: Software Reset Force and Flag.
Write
0: No Effect.
1: Forces a system reset.
Read
0: Source of last reset was not a write to the SWRSF bit.
1: Source of last was a write to the SWRSF bit.
Bit3:
WDTRSF: Watchdog Timer Reset Flag.
0: Source of last reset was not a WDT timeout.
1: Source of last reset was a WDT timeout.
Bit2:
MCDRSF: Missing Clock Detector Flag.
Write:
0: Missing Clock Detector disabled.
1: Missing Clock Detector enabled; triggers a reset if a missing clock condition is detected.
Read:
0: Source of last reset was not a Missing Clock Detector timeout.
1: Source of last reset was a Missing Clock Detector timeout.
Bit1:
PORSF: Power-On Reset Force and Flag.
This bit is set anytime a power-on reset occurs. This may be due to a true power-on reset or a VDD
monitor reset. In either case, data memory should be considered indeterminate following the reset.
Writing this bit enables/disables the VDD monitor.
Write:
0: VDD monitor disabled.
1: VDD monitor enabled.
Read:
0: Last reset was not a power-on or VDD monitor reset.
1: Last reset was a power-on or VDD monitor reset; all other reset flags indeterminate.
Bit0:
PINRSF: HW Pin Reset Flag.
0: Source of last reset was not /RST pin.
1: Source of last reset was /RST pin.
R
R
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R
Reset Value
-
FERROR
C0RSEF
SWRSF
WDTRSF
MCDRSF
PORSF
PINRSF
Variable
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address:
0xEF
Page 82
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
Notes
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 83
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
10.
FLASH MEMORY
On-chip, re-programmable FLASH memory is included for program code and non-volatile data storage. The FLASH
memory can be programmed in-system, a single byte at a time, through the C2 interface or by software using the
MOVX instruction. Once cleared to logic 0, a FLASH bit must be erased to set it back to logic 1. FLASH bytes would
typically be erased (set to 0xFF) before being reprogrammed. The write and erase operations are automatically timed
by hardware for proper execution; data polling to determine the end of the write/erase operation is not required. Code
execution is stalled during a FLASH write/erase operation. Refer to Table 10.1 for complete FLASH memory electri-
cal characteristics.
10.1.
Programming The FLASH Memory
The simplest means of programming the FLASH memory is through the C2 interface using programming tools pro-
vided by Cygnal or a third party vendor. This is the only means for programming a non-initialized device. For details
on the C2 commands to program FLASH memory, see
Section "17. C2 Interface" on page 161
.
To ensure the integrity of FLASH contents, it is strongly recommended that the on-chip VDD Monitor be
enabled in any system that includes code that writes and/or erases FLASH memory from software.
10.1.1. FLASH Lock and Key Functions
FLASH writes and erases by user software are protected with a lock and key function; FLASH reads by user software
are unrestricted. The FLASH Lock and Key Register (FLKEY) must be written with the correct key codes, in
sequence, before FLASH operations may be performed. The key codes are: 0xA5, 0xF1. The timing does not matter,
but the codes must be written in order. If the key codes are written out of order, or the wrong codes are written,
FLASH writes and erases will be disabled until the next system reset. FLASH writes and erases will also be disabled
if a FLASH write or erase is attempted before the key codes have been written properly. The FLASH lock resets after
each write or erase; the key codes must be written again before a following FLASH operation can be performed. The
FLKEY register is detailed in Figure 10.3.
10.1.2. FLASH Erase Procedure
The FLASH memory can be programmed by software using the MOVX instruction with the address and data byte to
be programmed provided as normal operands. Before writing to FLASH memory using MOVX, FLASH write opera-
tions must be enabled by: (1) setting the PSWE Program Store Write Enable bit (PSCTL.0) to logic 1 (this directs the
MOVX writes to target FLASH memory); and (2) Writing the FLASH key codes in sequence to the FLASH Lock
register (FLKEY). The PSWE bit remains set until cleared by software.
A write to FLASH memory can clear bits but cannot set them; only an erase operation can set bits in FLASH. A byte
location to be programmed should be erased before a new value is written.
The 8k byte FLASH memory is orga-
nized in 512-byte pages. The erase operation applies to an entire page (setting all bytes in the page to 0xFF). To erase
an entire 512-byte page, perform the following steps:
Step 5. Disable interrupts (recommended).
Step 6. Set the Program Store Erase Enable bit (PSEE in the PSCTL register).
Step 7. Set the Program Store Write Enable bit (PSWE in the PSCTL register).
Step 8. Write the first key code to FLKEY: 0xA5.
Step 9. Write the second key code to FLKEY: 0xF1.
Step 10. Using the MOVX instruction, write a data byte to any location within the 512-byte page to be
erased.
Page 84
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
10.1.3. FLASH Write Procedure
FLASH bytes are programmed by software with the following sequence:
Step 1. Disable interrupts (recommended).
Step 2. Erase the 512-byte FLASH page containing the target location, as described in
Section 10.1.2
.
Step 3. Set the PSWE bit in PSCTL.
Step 4. Clear the PSEE bit in PSCTL.
Step 5. Write the first key code to FLKEY: 0xA5.
Step 6. Write the second key code to FLKEY: 0xF1.
Step 7. Using the MOVX instruction, write a single data byte to the desired location within the 512-byte
sector.
Steps 5-7 must be repeated for each byte to be written. After FLASH writes are complete, PSWE should be cleared so
that MOVX instructions do not target program memory.
Table 10.1. FLASH Electrical Characteristics
PARAMETER
CONDITIONS
MIN
TYP
MAX
UNITS
FLASH Size
C8051F300/1/2/3
8192
bytes
FLASH Size
C8051F304
4096
bytes
FLASH Size
C8051F305
2048
bytes
Endurance
20k
100k
Erase/Write
Erase Cycle Time
25 MHz System Clock
10
15
20
ms
Write Cycle Time
25 MHz System Clock
40
55
70
s
SYSCLK Frequency
(FLASH writes from
application code)
100
kHz
Note: 512 bytes at location 0x1E00 to 0x1FFF are reserved for factory use
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 85
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
10.2.
Non-volatile Data Storage
The FLASH memory can be used for non-volatile data storage as well as program code. This allows data such as cal-
ibration coefficients to be calculated and stored at run time. Data is written using the MOVX instruction and read
using the MOVC instruction.
10.3.
Security Options
The CIP-51 provides security options to protect the FLASH memory from inadvertent modification by software as
well as to prevent the viewing of proprietary program code and constants. The Program Store Write Enable (bit
PSWE in register PSCTL) and the Program Store Erase Enable (bit PSEE in register PSCTL) bits protect the FLASH
memory from accidental modification by software. PSWE must be explicitly set to `1' before software can modify
the FLASH memory; both PSWE and PSEE must be set to `1' before software can erase FLASH memory. Additional
security features prevent proprietary program code and data constants from being read or altered across the C2 inter-
face.
A security lock byte stored at the last byte of FLASH user space protects the FLASH program memory from being
read or altered across the C2 interface. See Table 10.2 for the security byte description; see Figure 10.1 for a program
memory map and the security byte locations for each device.
The lock bits can always be read and cleared to logic 0 regardless of the security settings.
Important note: The only means of removing a lock (write or read/write) once set is to erase the entire pro-
gram memory space via a C2 Device Erase command.
Table 10.2. Security Byte Decoding
Bits
Description
7-4
Write Lock: Clearing any of these bits to logic 0 prevents all FLASH
memory from being written or page-erased across the C2 interface
3-0
Read/Write Lock: Clearing any of these bits to logic 0 prevents all FLASH
memory from being read, written, or page-erased across the C2 interface.
C8051F300/1/2/3
0x0000
0x1DFF
Lock Byte
Reserved
0x1DFE
FLASH memory
organized in 512-byte
pages
0x1E00
0x0000
0x0FFF
Reserved
0x0FFE
FLASH memory
organized in 512-byte
pages
0x1000
0x0000
0x07FF
Lock Byte
Reserved
0x07FE
FLASH memory
organized in 512-byte
pages
0x0800
Lock Byte
C8051F304
C8051F305
Figure 10.1. FLASH Program Memory Map
Page 86
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
Bits7-2:
UNUSED: Read = 000000b, Write = don't care.
Bit1:
PSEE: Program Store Erase Enable
Setting this bit (in combination with PSWE) allows an entire page of FLASH program memory to be
erased. If this bit is logic 1 and FLASH writes are enabled (PSWE is logic 1), a write to FLASH
memory using the MOVX instruction will erase the entire page that contains the location addressed
by the MOVX instruction. The value of the data byte written does not matter.
0: FLASH program memory erasure disabled.
1: FLASH program memory erasure enabled.
Bit0:
PSWE: Program Store Write Enable
Setting this bit allows writing a byte of data to the FLASH program memory using the MOVX
instruction. The FLASH location should be erased before writing data.
0: Writes to FLASH program memory disabled.
1: Writes to FLASH program memory enabled; the MOVX instruction targets FLASH memory.
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
-
-
-
-
-
-
PSEE
PSWE
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address:
0x8F
Figure 10.2. PSCTL: Program Store R/W Control
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 87
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
Figure 10.3. FLKEY: FLASH Lock and Key Register
Bits7-0:
FLKEY: FLASH Lock and Key Register
Write:
This register must be written to before FLASH writes or erases can be performed. FLASH remains
locked until this register is written to with the following key codes: 0xA5, 0xF1. The timing of the
writes does not matter, as long as the codes are written in order. The key codes must be written for
each FLASH write or erase operation. FLASH will be locked until the next system reset if the wrong
codes are written or if a FLASH operation is attempted before the codes have been written correctly.
Read:
When read, bits 1-0 indicate the current FLASH lock state.
00: FLASH is write/erase locked.
01: The first key code has been written (0xA5).
10: FLASH is unlocked (writes/erases allowed).
11: FLASH writes/erases disabled until the next reset.
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address:
0xB7
Figure 10.4. FLSCL: FLASH Scale Register
Bits7:
FOSE: FLASH One-shot Enable
This bit enables the 50 ns FLASH read one-shot. When the FLASH one-shot disabled, the FLASH
sense amps are enabled for a full clock cycle during FLASH reads.
0: FLASH one-shot disabled.
1: FLASH one-shot enabled.
Bits6-0:
RESERVED. Read = 0. Must Write 0.
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
FOSE
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
10000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address:
0xB6
Page 88
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
Notes
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 89
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
11.
OSCILLATORS
C8051F300/1/2/3/4/5 devices include a programmable internal oscillator and an external oscillator drive circuit. The
internal oscillator can be enabled/disabled and calibrated using the OSCICN and OSCICL registers, as shown in
Figure 11.1. The system clock can be sourced by the external oscillator circuit, the internal oscillator, or a scaled ver-
sion of the internal oscillator. The internal oscillator's electrical specifications are given in Table 11.1 on page 91.
11.1.
Programmable Internal Oscillator
All C8051F300/1/2/3/4/5 devices include a programmable internal oscillator that defaults as the system clock after a
system reset. The internal oscillator period can be adjusted via the OSCICL register as defined by Figure 11.2. On
C8051F300/1 devices, OSCICL is factory calibrated to obtain a 24.5 MHz frequency. On C8051F302/3/4/5 devices,
the oscillator frequency is a nominal 20 MHz and may vary 20% from device-to-device.
Electrical specifications for the precision internal oscillator are given in Table 11.1 on page 91. The programmed
internal oscillator frequency must not exceed 25 MHz. Note that the system clock may be derived from the pro-
grammed internal oscillator divided by 1, 2, 4, or 8, as defined by the IFCN bits in register OSCICN. The divide value
defaults to 8 following a reset.
Figure 11.1. Oscillator Diagram
OSC
Programmable
Internal Clock
Generator
Input
Circuit
EN
SYSCLK
n
OSCICL
OSCICN
IF
RD
Y
CL
K
S
L
IOS
C
E
N
IF
CN1
IF
CN0
XTAL1
XTAL2
Option 2
VDD
XTAL2
Option 1
10M
Option 3
XTAL2
Option 4
XTAL2
OSCXCN
X
T
LV
LD
XO
SC
M
D
2
XO
SC
M
D
1
XO
SC
M
D
0
XFCN
2
XFCN
1
XFCN
0
Page 90
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
Figure 11.2. OSCICL: Internal Oscillator Calibration Register
Bit7:
UNUSED. Read = 0. Write = don't care.
Bits 6-0:
OSCICL: Internal Oscillator Calibration Register.
This register calibrates the internal oscillator period. The reset value for OSCICL defines the internal
oscillator base frequency. On C8051F300/1 devices, the reset value is factory calibrated to generate
an internal oscillator frequency of 24.5 MHz.
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
-
Variable
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address:
0xB3
Figure 11.3. OSCICN: Internal Oscillator Control Register
Bits7-5:
UNUSED. Read = 000b, Write = don't care.
Bit4:
IFRDY: Internal Oscillator Frequency Ready Flag.
0: Internal Oscillator is not running at programmed frequency.
1: Internal Oscillator is running at programmed frequency.
Bit3:
CLKSL: System Clock Source Select Bit.
0: SYSCLK derived from the Internal Oscillator, and scaled as per the IFCN bits.
1: SYSCLK derived from the External Oscillator circuit.
Bit2:
IOSCEN: Internal Oscillator Enable Bit.
0: Internal Oscillator Disabled.
1: Internal Oscillator Enabled.
Bits1-0:
IFCN1-0: Internal Oscillator Frequency Control Bits.
00: SYSCLK derived from Internal Oscillator divided by 8.
01: SYSCLK derived from Internal Oscillator divided by 4.
10: SYSCLK derived from Internal Oscillator divided by 2.
11: SYSCLK derived from Internal Oscillator divided by 1.
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
-
-
-
IFRDY
CLKSL
IOSCEN
IFCN1
IFCN0
00010100
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address:
0xB2
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 91
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
11.2.
External Oscillator Drive Circuit
The external oscillator circuit may drive an external crystal, ceramic resonator, capacitor, or RC network. A CMOS
clock may also provide a clock input. For a crystal or ceramic resonator configuration, the crystal/resonator must be
wired across the XTAL1 and XTAL2 pins as shown in Option 1 of Figure 11.1. A 10 M
resistor also must be wired
across the XTAL2 and XTAL1 pins for the crystal/resonator configuration. In RC, capacitor, or CMOS clock config-
uration, the clock source should be wired to the XTAL2 pin as shown in Option 2, 3, or 4 of Figure 11.1. The type of
external oscillator must be selected in the OSCXCN register, and the frequency control bits (XFCN) must be selected
appropriately (see Figure 11.4).
Important Note on External Oscillator Usage: Port pins must be configured when using the external oscillator cir-
cuit. When the external oscillator drive circuit is enabled in crystal/resonator mode, Port pins P0.2 and P0.3 are occu-
pied as XTAL1 and XTAL2 respectively. When the external oscillator drive circuit is enabled in capacitor, RC, or
CMOS clock mode, Port pin P0.3 is occupied as XTAL2. The Port I/O Crossbar should be configured to skip the
occupied Port pins; see
Section "12.1. Priority Crossbar Decoder" on page 96
for Crossbar configuration. Addi-
tionally, when using the external oscillator circuit in crystal/resonator, capacitor, or RC mode, the associated Port pins
should be configured as analog inputs. In CMOS clock mode, the associated pin should be configured as a digital
input
. See
Section "12.2. Port I/O Initialization" on page 98
for details on Port input mode selection.
11.3.
System Clock Selection
The CLKSL bit in register OSCICN selects which oscillator is used as the system clock. CLKSL must be set to `1' for
the system clock to run from the external oscillator; however the external oscillator may still clock peripherals (tim-
ers, PCA) when the internal oscillator is selected as the system clock. The system clock may be switched on-the-fly
between the internal and external oscillator, so long as the selected oscillator is enabled and has settled. The internal
oscillator requires little start-up time and may be enabled and selected as the system clock in the same write to
OSCICN. External crystals and ceramic resonators typically require a start-up time before they are settled and ready
for use as the system clock. The Crystal Valid Flag (XTLVLD in register OSCXCN) is set to `1' by hardware when
the external oscillator is settled. To avoid reading a false XTLVLD, in crystal mode software should delay at least
1 ms between enabling the external oscillator and checking XTLVLD. RC and C modes typically require no startup
time.
Table 11.1. Internal Oscillator Electrical Characteristics
-40C to +85C unless otherwise specified
PARAMETER
CONDITIONS
MIN
TYP
MAX
UNITS
Calibrated Internal Oscillator
Frequency
C8051F300/1 devices
24
24.5
25
MHz
Uncalibrated Internal Oscillator
Frequency
C8051F302/3/4/5 devices
16
20
24
MHz
Internal Oscillator Supply Current
(from VDD)
OSCICN.2 = 1
450
A
Page 92
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
Figure 11.4. OSCXCN: External Oscillator Control Register
Bit7:
XTLVLD: Crystal Oscillator Valid Flag.
(Read only when XOSCMD = 11x.)
0: Crystal Oscillator is unused or not yet stable.
1: Crystal Oscillator is running and stable.
Bits6-4:
XOSCMD2-0: External Oscillator Mode Bits.
00x: External Oscillator circuit off.
010: External CMOS Clock Mode.
011: External CMOS Clock Mode with divide by 2 stage.
100: RC Oscillator Mode with divide by 2 stage.
101: Capacitor Oscillator Mode with divide by 2 stage.
110: Crystal Oscillator Mode.
111: Crystal Oscillator Mode with divide by 2 stage.
Bit3:
RESERVED. Read = 0, Write = don't care.
Bits2-0:
XFCN2-0: External Oscillator Frequency Control Bits.
000-111: See table below:
CRYSTAL MODE (Circuit from Figure 11.1, Option 1; XOSCMD = 11x)
Choose XFCN value to match crystal frequency.
RC MODE (Circuit from Figure 11.1, Option 2; XOSCMD = 10x)
Choose XFCN value to match frequency range:
f = 1.23(10
3
) / (R * C), where
f = frequency of oscillation in MHz
C = capacitor value in pF
R = Pull-up resistor value in k
C MODE (Circuit from Figure 11.1, Option 3; XOSCMD = 10x)
Choose K Factor (KF) for the oscillation frequency desired:
f = KF / (C * VDD), where
f = frequency of oscillation in MHz
C = capacitor value the XTAL2 pin in pF
VDD = Power Supply on MCU in volts
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
XTLVLD XOSCMD2 XOSCMD1 XOSCMD0
-
XFCN2
XFCN1
XFCN0
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address:
0xB1
XFCN
Crystal (XOSCMD = 11x)
RC (XOSCMD = 10x)
C (XOSCMD = 10x)
000
f
32kHz
f
25kHz
K Factor = 0.87
001
32kHz
< f 84kHz
25kHz
< f 50kHz
K Factor = 2.6
010
84kHz
< f 225kHz
50kHz
< f 100kHz
K Factor = 7.7
011
225kHz
< f 590kHz
100kHz
< f 200kHz
K Factor = 22
100
590kHz
< f 1.5MHz
200kHz
< f 400kHz
K Factor = 65
101
1.5MHz
< f 4MHz
400kHz
< f 800kHz
K Factor = 180
110
4MHz
< f 10MHz
800kHz
< f 1.6MHz
K Factor = 664
111
10MHz
< f 30MHz
1.6MHz
< f 3.2MHz
K Factor = 1590
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 93
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
11.4.
External Crystal Example
If a crystal or ceramic resonator is used as an external oscillator source for the MCU, the circuit should be configured
as shown in Figure 11.1, Option 1. The External Oscillator Frequency Control value (XFCN) should be chosen from
the Crystal colum of the table in Figure 11.4 (OSCXCN register). For example, an 11.0592 MHz crystal requires an
XFCN setting of 111b.
When the crystal oscillator is first enabled, the oscillator amplitude detection circuit requires a settling time to
achieve proper bias. Introducing a delay of 1 ms between enabling the oscillator and checking the XTLVLD bit will
prevent a premature switch to the external oscillator as the system clock. Switching to the external oscillator before
the crystal oscillator has stabilized can result in unpredictable behavior. The recommended procedure is:
Step 1. Enable the external oscillator.
Step 2. Wait at least 1 ms.
Step 3. Poll for XTLVLD => `1'.
Step 4. Switch the system clock to the external oscillator.
Important Note on External Crystals: Crystal oscillator circuits are quite sensitive to PCB layout. The crystal
should be placed as close as possible to the XTAL pins on the device. The traces should be as short as possible and
shielded with ground plane from any other traces which could introduce noise or interference.
11.5.
External RC Example
If an RC network is used as an external oscillator source for the MCU, the circuit should be configured as shown in
Figure 11.1, Option 2. The capacitor should be no greater than 100 pF; however for very small capacitors, the total
capacitance may be dominated by parasitic capacitance in the PCB layout. To determine the required External Oscil-
lator Frequency Control value (XFCN) in the OSCXCN Register, first select the RC network value to produce the
desired frequency of oscillation. If the frequency desired is 100 kHz, let R = 246 k
and C = 50 pF:
f = 1.23( 10
3
) / RC = 1.23 ( 10
3
) / [ 246 * 50 ] = 0.1 MHz = 100 kHz
Referring to the table in Figure 11.4, the required XFCN setting is 010b.
11.6.
External Capacitor Example
If a capacitor is used as an external oscillator for the MCU, the circuit should be configured as shown in Figure 11.1,
Option 3. The capacitor should be no greater than 100 pF; however for very small capacitors, the total capacitance
may be dominated by parasitic capacitance in the PCB layout. To determine the required External Oscillator Fre-
quency Control value (XFCN) in the OSCXCN Register, select the capacitor to be used and find the frequency of
oscillation from the equations below. Assume VDD = 3.0 V and C = 50 pF:
f = KF / ( C * VDD ) = KF / ( 50 * 3 ) MHz
f = KF / 150 MHz
If a frequency of roughly 150 kHz is desired, select the K Factor from the table in Figure 11.4 as KF = 22:
f = 22 / 150 = 0.146 MHz, or 146 kHz
Therefore, the XFCN value to use in this example is 011b.
Page 94
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
Notes
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 95
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
12.
PORT INPUT/OUTPUT
Digital and analog resources are available through a byte-wide digital I/O Port, Port0. Each of the Port pins can be
defined as general-purpose I/O (GPIO), analog input, or assigned to one of the internal digital resources as shown in
Figure 12.3. The designer has complete control over which functions are assigned, limited only by the number of
physical I/O pins. This resource assignment flexibility is achieved through the use of a Priority Crossbar Decoder.
Note that the state of a Port I/O pin can always be read in the corresponding Port latch, regardless of the Crossbar set-
tings.
The Crossbar assigns the selected internal digital resources to the I/O pins based on the Priority Decoder (Figure 12.3
and Figure 12.4). The registers XBR0, XBR1, and XBR2, defined in Figure 12.5, Figure 12.6, and Figure 12.7 are
used to select internal digital functions.
All Port I/Os are 5 V tolerant (refer to Figure 12.2 for the Port cell circuit). The Port I/O cells are configured as either
push-pull or open-drain in the Port0 Output Mode register (P0MDOUT). Complete Electrical Specifications for Port
I/O are given in Table 12.1 on page 102.
Figure 12.1. Port I/O Functional Block Diagram
XBR0, XBR1,
XBR2 Registers
Digital
Crossbar
Priority
Decoder
SYSCLK
2
2
(
I
nter
nal
Digit
a
l
S
ignals
)
Highest
Priority
Lowest
Priority
P0
I/O
Cells
P0.0
P0.7
8
P0MDOUT,
P0MDIN Registers
SMBus
UART
T0, T1
2
4
PCA
P0
Port Latch
(P0.0-P0.7)
8
CP0
Outputs
2
Figure 12.2. Port I/O Cell Block Diagram
GND
/PORT-OUTENABLE
PORT-OUTPUT
PUSH-PULL
VDD
VDD
/WEAK-PULLUP
(WEAK)
PORT
PAD
ANALOG INPUT
Analog Select
PORT-INPUT
Page 96
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
12.1.
Priority Crossbar Decoder
The Priority Crossbar Decoder (Figure 12.3) assigns a priority to each I/O function, starting at the top with UART0.
When a digital resource is selected, the least-significant unassigned Port pin is assigned to that resource (excluding
UART0, which is always at pins 4 and 5). If a Port pin is assigned, the Crossbar skips that pin when assigning the next
selected resource. Additionally, the Crossbar will skip Port pins whose associated bits in the XBR0 register are set.
The XBR0 register allows software to skip Port pins that are to be used for analog input or GPIO.
Important Note on Crossbar Configuration: If a Port pin is claimed by a peripheral without use of the Crossbar, its
corresponding XBR0 bit should be set. This applies to P0.0 if VREF is enabled, P0.3 and/or P0.2 if the external oscil-
lator circuit is enabled, P0.6 if the ADC is configured to use the external conversion start signal (CNVSTR), and any
selected ADC or Comparator inputs. The Crossbar skips selected pins as if they were already assigned, and moves to
the next unassigned pin. Figure 12.3 shows the Crossbar Decoder priority with no Port pins skipped (XBR0 = 0x00);
Figure 12.4 shows the Crossbar Decoder priority with pins 6 and 2 skipped (XBR0 = 0x44).
Figure 12.3. Crossbar Priority Decoder with XBR0 = 0x00
VREF
x1
x2
CNVSTR
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
CEX2
CP0A
SYSCLK
CEX0
CEX1
Signa
ls
Una
v
a
ila
ble
SF Signals
PIN I/O
TX0
RX0
SDA
SCL
P0
CP0
Port pin potentially available to peripheral
SF Signals
ECI
T0
T1
XBR0[0:7]
Special Function Signals are not assigned by the crossbar.
When these signals are enabled, the CrossBar must be
manually configured to skip their corresponding port pins.
Note: x1 refers to the XTAL1 signal; x2 refers to the XTAL2
signal.
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 97
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
Registers XBR1 and XBR2 are used to assign the digital I/O resources to the physical I/O Port pins. Note that when
the SMBus is selected, the Crossbar assigns both pins associated with the SMBus (SDA and SCL). Either or both of
the UART signals may be selected by the Crossbar. UART0 pin assignments are fixed for bootloading purposes:
when UART TX0 is selected, it is always assigned to P0.4; when UART RX0 is selected, it is always assigned to
P0.5. Standard Port I/Os appear contiguously after the prioritized functions have been assigned. For example, if
assigned functions that take the first 3 Port I/O (P0.[2:0]), 5 Port I/O are left for analog or GPIO use.
Figure 12.4. Crossbar Priority Decoder with XBR0 = 0x44
VREF
x1
x2
CNVSTR
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
Port pin potentially available to peripheral
Port pin skipped by CrossBar
Signa
ls
Una
v
a
ila
ble
RX0
SDA
SCL
CP0
CEX0
CEX1
Special Function Signals are not assigned by the crossbar. When
these signals are enabled, the CrossBar must be manually
configured to skip their corresponding port pins. Note: x1 refers to
the XTAL1 signal; x2 refers to the XTAL2 signal.
SF Signals
CEX2
ECI
CP0A
SYSCLK
P0
XBR0[0:7]
T0
T1
SF Signals
PIN I/O
TX0
Page 98
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
12.2.
Port I/O Initialization
Port I/O initialization consists of the following steps:
Step 1. Select the input mode (analog or digital) for all Port pins, using the Port0 Input Mode register
(P0MDIN).
Step 2. Select the output mode (open-drain or push-pull) for all Port pins, using the Port0 Output Mode
register (P0MDOUT).
Step 3. Set XBR0 to skip any pins selected as analog inputs or special functions.
Step 4. Assign Port pins to desired peripherals.
Step 5. Enable the Crossbar.
All Port pins must be configured as either analog or digital inputs. Any pins to be used as Comparator or ADC inputs
should be configured as an analog inputs. When a pin is configured as an analog input, its weak pull-up, digital driver,
and digital receiver is disabled. This process saves power and reduces noise on the analog input. Pins configured as
digital inputs may still be used by analog peripherals; however this practice is not recommended.
Additionally, all analog input pins should be configured to be skipped by the Crossbar (accomplished by setting the
associated bits in XBR0). Port input mode is set in the P0MDIN register, where a `1' indicates a digital input, and a
`0' indicates an analog input. All pins default to digital inputs on reset. See Figure 12.9 for the P0MDIN register
details.
The output driver characteristics of the I/O pins are defined using the Port0 Output Mode register P0MDOUT (see
Figure 12.10). Each Port Output driver can be configured as either open drain or push-pull. This selection is required
even for the digital resources selected in the XBRn registers, and is not automatic. The only exception to this is the
SMBus (SDA, SCL) pins, which are configured as open-drain regardless of the P0MDOUT settings. When the
WEAKPUD bit in XBR2 is `0', a weak pull-up is enabled for all Port I/O configured as open-drain. WEAKPUD does
not affect the push-pull Port I/O. Furthermore, the weak pull-up is turned off on an open-drain output that is driving a
`0' to avoid unnecessary power dissipation.
Registers XBR0, XBR1 and XBR2 must be loaded with the appropriate values to select the digital I/O functions
required by the design. Setting the XBARE bit in XBR2 to `1' enables the Crossbar. Until the Crossbar is enabled, the
external pins remain as standard digital inputs (output drivers disabled) regardless of the XBRn Register settings. For
given XBRn Register settings, one can determine the I/O pin-out using the Priority Decode Table; as an alternative,
the Configuration Wizard utility of the Cygnal IDE software will determine the Port I/O pin-assignments based on the
XBRn Register settings.
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 99
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
Figure 12.5. XBR0: Port I/O Crossbar Register 0
Bit7:
UNUSED. Read = 0b; Write = don't care.
Bits6-0:
XSKP[6:0]: Crossbar Skip Enable Bits
These bits select Port pins to be skipped by the Crossbar Decoder. Port pins used as analog inputs (for
ADC or Comparator) or used as special functions (VREF input, external oscillator circuit, CNVSTR
input) should be skipped by the Crossbar.
0: Corresponding P0.n pin is not skipped by the Crossbar.
1: Corresponding P0.n pin is skipped by the Crossbar.
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
-
XSKP6
XSKP5
XSKP4
XSKP3
XSKP2
XSKP1
XSKP0
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address:
0xE1
Figure 12.6. XBR1: Port I/O Crossbar Register 1
Bits7-6:
PCA0ME: PCA Module I/0 Enable Bits
00: All PCA I/O unavailable at Port pins.
01: CEX0 routed to Port pin.
10: CEX0, CEX1 routed to Port pins.
11: CEX0, CEX1, CEX2 routed to Port pins.
Bit5:
CP0AOEN: Comparator0 Asynchronous Output Enable
0: Asynchronous CP0 unavailable at Port pin.
1: Asynchronous CP0 routed to Port pin.
Bit4:
CP0OEN: Comparator0 Output Enable
0: CP0 unavailable at Port pin.
1: CP0 routed to Port pin.
Bit3:
SYSCKE: /SYSCLK Output Enable
0: /SYSCLK unavailable at Port pin.
1: /SYSCLK output routed to Port pin.
Bit2:
SMB0OEN: SMBus I/O Enable
0: SMBus I/O unavailable at Port pins.
1: SDA, SCL routed to Port pins.
Bit1:
URX0EN: UART RX Enable
0: UART RX0 unavailable at Port pin.
1: UART RX0 routed to Port pin P0.5.
Bit0:
UTX0EN: UART TX Output Enable
0: UART TX0 unavailable at Port pin.
1: UART TX0 routed to Port pin P0.4.
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
PCA0ME
CP0AOEN CP0OEN
SYSCKE SMB0OEN URX0EN
UTX0EN
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address:
0xE2
Page 100
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
Figure 12.7. XBR2: Port I/O Crossbar Register 2
Bit7:
WEAKPUD: Port I/O Weak Pull-up Disable.
0: Weak Pull-ups enabled (except for Ports whose I/O are configured as push-pull).
1: Weak Pull-ups disabled.
Bit6:
XBARE: Crossbar Enable.
0: Crossbar disabled.
1: Crossbar enabled.
Bits5-3:
UNUSED: Read=000b. Write = don't care.
Bit2:
T1E: T1 Enable.
0: T1 unavailable at Port pin.
1: T1 routed to Port pin.
Bit1:
T0E: T0 Enable.
0: T0 unavailable at Port pin.
1: T0 routed to Port pin.
Bit0:
ECIE: PCA0 Counter Input Enable.
0: ECI unavailable at Port pin.
1: ECI routed to Port pin.
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
WEAKPUD
XBARE
-
-
-
T1E
T0E
ECIE
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address:
0xE3
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 101
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
12.3.
General Purpose Port I/O
Port pins that remain unassigned by the Crossbar and are not used by analog peripherals can be used for general pur-
pose I/O. Port0 is accessed through a corresponding special function register (SFR) that is both byte addressable and
bit addressable. When writing to a Port, the value written to the SFR is latched to maintain the output data value at
each pin. When reading, the logic levels of the Port's input pins are returned regardless of the XBRn settings (i.e.,
even when the pin is assigned to another signal by the Crossbar, the Port register can always read its corresponding
Port I/O pin). The exception to this is the execution of the read-modify-write instructions. The read-modify-write
instructions when operating on a Port SFR are the following: ANL, ORL, XRL, JBC, CPL, INC, DEC, DJNZ and
MOV, CLR or SET, when the destination is an individual bit in a Port SFR. For these instructions, the value of the
register (not the pin) is read, modified, and written back to the SFR.
Figure 12.8. P0: Port0 Register
Bits7-0:
P0.[7:0]
Write - Output appears on I/O pins per XBR0, XBR1, and XBR2 Registers
0: Logic Low Output.
1: Logic High Output (open-drain if corresponding P0MDOUT.n bit = 0)
Read - Always reads `1' if selected as analog input in register P0MDIN. Directly reads Port pin when
configured as digital input.
0: P0.n pin is logic low.
1: P0.n pin is logic high.
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
P0.7
P0.6
P0.5
P0.4
P0.3
P0.2
P0.1
P0.0
11111111
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address:
(bit addressable)
0x80
Figure 12.9. P0MDIN: Port0 Input Mode Register
Bits7-0:
Input Configuration Bits for P0.7-P0.0 (respectively)
Port pins configured as analog inputs have their weak pull-up, digital driver, and digital receiver dis-
abled.
0: Corresponding P0.n pin is configured as an analog input.
1: Corresponding P0.n pin is configured as a digital input.
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
11111111
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address:
0xF1
Page 102
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
Table 12.1. Port I/O DC Electrical Characteristics
VDD = 2.7 to 3.6V, -40C to +85C unless otherwise specified
PARAMETERS
CONDITIONS
MIN
TYP
MAX
UNITS
Output High Voltage
I
OH
= -3mA, Port I/O push-pull
I
OH
= -10A, Port I/O push-pull
I
OH
= -10mA, Port I/O push-pull
VDD-0.7
VDD-0.1
VDD-0.8
V
Output Low Voltage
I
OL
= 8.5mA
I
OL
= 10A
I
OL
= 25mA
1.0
0.6
0.1
V
Input High Voltage
2.0
V
Input Low Voltage
0.8
V
Input Leakage Current
Weak Pull-up Off
Weak Pull-up On, V
IN
= 0 V
25
1
40
A
Figure 12.10. P0MDOUT: Port0 Output Mode Register
Bits7-0:
Output Configuration Bits for P0.7-P0.0 (respectively): ignored if corresponding bit in register
P0MDIN is logic 0.
0: Corresponding P0.n Output is open-drain.
1: Corresponding P0.n Output is push-pull.
(Note: When SDA and SCL appear on any of the Port I/O, each are open-drain regardless of the value
of P0MDOUT).
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address:
0xA4
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 103
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
13.
SMBUS
The SMBus I/O interface is a two-wire, bi-directional serial bus. The SMBus is compliant with the System Manage-
ment Bus Specification, version 1.1, and compatible with the I
2
C serial bus. Reads and writes to the interface by the
system controller are byte oriented with the SMBus interface autonomously controlling the serial transfer of the data.
Data can be transferred at up to 1/10th of the system clock operating as master or slave (this can be faster than
allowed by the SMBus specification, depending on the system clock used). A method of extending the clock-low
duration is available to accommodate devices with different speed capabilities on the same bus.
The SMBus interface may operate as a master and/or slave, and may function on a bus with multiple masters. The
SMBus provides control of SDA (serial data), SCL (serial clock) generation and synchronization, arbitration logic,
and START/STOP control and generation. Three SFRs are associated with the SMBus: SMB0CF configures the
SMBus; SMB0CN controls the status of the SMBus; and SMB0DAT is the data register, used for both transmitting
and receiving SMBus data and slave addresses.
Figure 13.1. SMBus Block Diagram
Data Path
Control
SMBUS CONTROL LOGIC
C
R
O
S
S
B
A
R
SCL
FILTER
N
SDA
Control
SCL
Control
Arbitration
SCL Synchronization
IRQ Generation
SCL Generation (Master Mode)
SDA Control
Interrupt
Request
Port I/O
SMB0CN
S
T
A
A
C
K
R
Q
A
R
B
L
O
S
T
A
C
K
S
I
T
X
M
O
D
E
M
A
S
T
E
R
S
T
O
01
00
10
11
T0 Overflow
T1 Overflow
TMR2H Overflow
TMR2L Overflow
SMB0CF
E
N
S
M
B
I
N
H
B
U
S
Y
E
X
T
H
O
L
D
S
M
B
T
O
E
S
M
B
F
T
E
S
M
B
C
S
1
S
M
B
C
S
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SMB0DAT
SDA
FILTER
N
Page 104
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
13.1.
Supporting Documents
It is assumed the reader is familiar with or has access to the following supporting documents:
1.
The I
2
C-Bus and How to Use It (including specifications), Philips Semiconductor.
2.
The I
2
C-Bus Specification -- Version 2.0, Philips Semiconductor.
3.
System Management Bus Specification -- Version 1.1, SBS Implementers Forum.
13.2.
SMBus Configuration
Figure 13.2 shows a typical SMBus configuration. The SMBus specification allows any recessive voltage between
3.0 V and 5.0 V; different devices on the bus may operate at different voltage levels. The bi-directional SCL (serial
clock) and SDA (serial data) lines must be connected to a positive power supply voltage through a pull-up resistor or
similar circuit. Every device connected to the bus must have an open-drain or open-collector output for both the SCL
and SDA lines, so that both are pulled high (recessive state) when the bus is free. The maximum number of devices
on the bus is limited only by the requirement that the rise and fall times on the bus not exceed 300 ns and 1000 ns,
respectively.
Figure 13.2. Typical SMBus Configuration
VDD = 5V
Master
Device
Slave
Device 1
Slave
Device 2
VDD = 3V
VDD = 5V
VDD = 3V
SDA
SCL
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 105
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
13.3.
SMBus Operation
Two types of data transfers are possible: data transfers from a master transmitter to an addressed slave receiver
(WRITE), and data transfers from an addressed slave transmitter to a master receiver (READ). The master device ini-
tiates both types of data transfers and provides the serial clock pulses on SCL. The SMBus interface may operate as a
master or a slave, and multiple master devices on the same bus are supported. If two or more masters attempt to ini-
tiate a data transfer simultaneously, an arbitration scheme is employed with a single master always winning the arbi-
tration. Note that it is not necessary to specify one device as the Master in a system; any device that transmits a
START and a slave address becomes the master for the duration of that transfer.
A typical SMBus transaction consists of a START condition followed by an address byte (Bits7-1: 7-bit slave
address; Bit0: R/W direction bit), one or more bytes of data, and a STOP condition. Each byte that is received (by a
master or slave) must be acknowledged (ACK) with a low SDA during a high SCL (see Figure 13.3). If the receiving
device does not ACK, the transmitting device will read a NACK (not acknowledge), which is a high SDA during a
high SCL.
The direction bit (R/W) occupies the least-significant bit position of the address byte. The direction bit is set to
logic 1 to indicate a "READ" operation and cleared to logic 0 to indicate a "WRITE" operation.
All transactions are initiated by a master, with one or more addressed slave devices as the target. The master gener-
ates the START condition and then transmits the slave address and direction bit. If the transaction is a WRITE opera-
tion from the master to the slave, the master transmits the data a byte at a time waiting for an ACK from the slave at
the end of each byte. For READ operations, the slave transmits the data waiting for an ACK from the master at the
end of each byte. At the end of the data transfer, the master generates a STOP condition to terminate the transaction
and free the bus. Figure 13.3 illustrates a typical SMBus transaction.
13.3.1. Arbitration
A master may start a transfer only if the bus is free. The bus is free after a STOP condition or after the SCL and SDA
lines remain high for a specified time (see
Section "13.3.4. SCL High (SMBus Free) Timeout" on page 106
). In the
event that two or more devices attempt to begin a transfer at the same time, an arbitration scheme is employed to
force one master to give up the bus. The master devices continue transmitting until one attempts a HIGH while the
other transmits a LOW. Since the bus is open-drain, the bus will be pulled LOW. The master attempting the HIGH
will detect a LOW SDA and lose the arbitration. The winning master continues its transmission without interruption;
the losing master becomes a slave and receives the rest of the transfer if addressed. This arbitration scheme is non-
destructive: one device always wins, and no data is lost.
Figure 13.3. SMBus Transaction
SLA6
SDA
SLA5-0
R/W
D7
D6-0
SCL
Slave Address + R/W
Data Byte
START
ACK
NACK
STOP
Page 106
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
13.3.2. Clock Low Extension
SMBus provides a clock synchronization mechanism, similar to I
2
C, which allows devices with different speed capa-
bilities to coexist on the bus. A clock-low extension is used during a transfer in order to allow slower slave devices to
communicate with faster masters. The slave may temporarily hold the SCL line LOW to extend the clock low period,
effectively decreasing the serial clock frequency.
13.3.3. SCL Low Timeout
If the SCL line is held low by a slave device on the bus, no further communication is possible. Furthermore, the mas-
ter cannot force the SCL line high to correct the error condition. To solve this problem, the SMBus protocol specifies
that devices participating in a transfer must detect any clock cycle held low longer than 25 ms as a "timeout" condi-
tion. Devices that have detected the timeout condition must reset the communication no later than 10 ms after detect-
ing the timeout condition.
When the SMBTOE bit in SMB0CF is set, Timer 2 is used to detect SCL low timeouts. Timer 2 is forced to reload
when SCL is high, and allowed to count when SCL is low. With Timer 2 enabled and configured to overflow after
25 ms (and SMBTOE set), the Timer 2 interrupt service routine can be used to reset (disable and re-enable) the
SMBus in the event of an SCL low timeout. Timer 2 configuration details can be found in
Section "15.2. Timer 2"
on page 141
.
13.3.4. SCL High (SMBus Free) Timeout
The SMBus specification stipulates that if the SCL and SDA lines remain high for more that 50 s, the bus is desig-
nated as free. When the SMBFTE bit in SMB0CF is set, the bus will be considered free if SCL and SDA remain high
for more than 10 SMBus clock source periods. If the SMBus is waiting to generate a Master START, the START will
be generated following this timeout. Note that a clock source is required for free timeout detection, even in a slave-
only implementation.
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 107
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
13.4.
Using the SMBus
The SMBus can operate in both Master and Slave modes. The interface provides timing and shifting control for serial
transfers; higher level protocol is determined by user software. The SMBus interface provides the following applica-
tion-independent features:
Byte-wise serial data transfers
Clock signal generation on SCL (Master Mode only) and SDA data synchronization
Timeout/bus error recognition, as defined by the SMB0CF configuration register
START/STOP timing, detection, and generation
Bus arbitration
Interrupt generation
Status information
SMBus interrupts are generated for each data byte or slave address that is transferred. When transmitting, this inter-
rupt is generated after the ACK cycle so that software may read the received ACK value; when receiving data, this
interrupt is generated before the ACK cycle so that software may define the outgoing ACK value. See
Section
"13.5. SMBus Transfer Modes" on page 115
for more details on transmission sequences.
Interrupts are also generated to indicate the beginning of a transfer when a master (START generated), or the end of a
transfer when a slave (STOP detected). Software should read the SMB0CN (SMBus Control register) to find the
cause of the SMBus interrupt. The SMB0CN register is described in
Section "13.4.2. SMB0CN Control Register"
on page 111
; Table 13.4 provides a quick SMB0CN decoding reference.
SMBus configuration options include:
Timeout detection (SCL Low Timeout and/or Bus Free Timeout)
SDA setup and hold time extensions
Slave event enable/disable
Clock source selection
These options are selected in the SMB0CF register, as described in
Section "13.4.1. SMBus Configuration Regis-
ter" on page 108
.
Page 108
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
13.4.1. SMBus Configuration Register
The SMBus Configuration register (SMB0CF) is used to enable the SMBus Master and/or Slave modes, select the
SMBus clock source, and select the SMBus timing and timeout options. When the ENSMB bit is set, the SMBus is
enabled for all master and slave events. Slave events may be disabled by setting the INH bit. With slave events inhib-
ited, the SMBus interface will still monitor the SCL and SDA pins; however, the interface will NACK all received
addresses and will not generate any slave interrupts. When the INH bit is set, all slave events will be inhibited follow-
ing the next START (interrupts will continue for the duration of the current transfer).
The SMBCS1-0 bits select the SMBus clock source, which is used only when operating as a master or when the Free
Timeout detection is enabled. When operating as a master, overflows from the selected source determine the absolute
minimum SCL low and high times as defined in Equation 13.1. Note that the selected clock source may be shared by
other peripherals so long as the timer is left running at all times. For example, Timer 1 overflows may generate the
SMBus and UART baud rates simultaneously. Timer configuration is covered in
Section "15. Timers" on page 133
.
The selected clock source should be configured to establish the minimum SCL High and Low times as per
Equation 13.1. When the interface is operating as a master (and SCL is not driven or extended by any other devices
on the bus), the typical SMBus bit rate is approximated by Equation 13.2.
Figure 13.4 shows the typical SCL generation described by Equation 13.2. Notice that T
HIGH
is typically twice as
large as T
LOW
. The actual SCL output may vary due to other devices on the bus (SCL may be extended low by slower
slave devices, or driven low by contending master devices). The bit rate when operating as a master will never exceed
the limits defined by equation Equation 13.1.
Table 13.1. SMBus Clock Source Selection
SMBCS1 SMBCS0 SMBus Clock Source
0
0
Timer 0 Overflow
0
1
Timer 1 Overflow
1
0
Timer 2 High Byte Overflow
1
1
Timer 2 Low Byte Overflow
Equation 13.1. Minimum SCL High and Low Times
T
HighMin
T
LowMin
1
f
ClockSourceOverflow
----------------------------------------------
=
=
Equation 13.2. Typical SMBus Bit Rate
BitRate
f
ClockSourceOverflow
3
----------------------------------------------
=
SCL
Timer Source
Overflows
SCL High Timeout
T
Low
T
High
Figure 13.4. Typical SMBus SCL Generation
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 109
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
Setting the EXTHOLD bit extends the minimum setup and hold times for the SDA line. The minimum SDA setup
time defines the absolute minimum time that SDA is stable before SCL transitions from low-to-high. The minimum
SDA hold time defines the absolute minimum time that the current SDA value remains stable after SCL transitions
from high-to-low. EXTHOLD should be set so that the minimum setup and hold times meet the SMBus Specification
requirements of 250 ns and 300 ns, respectively. Table 13.2 shows the minimum setup and hold times for the two
EXTHOLD settings. Setup and hold time extensions are typically necessary when SYSCLK is above 10 MHz.
With the SMBTOE bit set, Timer 2 should be configured to overflow after 25 ms in order to detect SCL low timeouts
(see
Section "13.3.3. SCL Low Timeout" on page 106
). The SMBus interface will force Timer 2 to reload while
SCL is high, and allow Timer 2 to count when SCL is low. The Timer 2 interrupt service routine should be used to
reset SMBus communication by disabling and re-enabling the SMBus. Timer 2 configuration is described in
Section
"15.2. Timer 2" on page 141
.
SMBus Free Timeout detection can be enabled by setting the SMBFTE bit. When this bit is set, the bus will be con-
sidered free if SDA and SCL remain high for more than 10 SMBus clock source periods (see Figure 13.4). When a
Free Timeout is detected, the interface will respond as if a STOP was detected (an interrupt will be generated, and
STO will be set).
Table 13.2. Minimum SDA Setup and Hold Times
EXTHOLD
Minimum SDA Setup Time
Minimum SDA Hold Time
0
T
low
- 4 system clocks
OR
1 system clock + s/w delay
3 system clocks
1
11 system clocks
12 system clocks
Setup Time for ACK bit transmissions and the MSB of all data transfers. The s/w delay
occurs between the time SMB0DAT or ACK is written and when SI is cleared. Note that if
SI is cleared in the same write that defines the outgoing ACK value, s/w delay is zero.
Page 110
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
Figure 13.5. SMB0CF: SMBus Clock/Configuration Register
Bit7:
ENSMB: SMBus Enable.
This bit enables/disables the SMBus interface. When enabled, the interface constantly monitors the
SDA and SCL pins.
0: SMBus interface disabled.
1: SMBus interface enabled.
Bit6:
INH: SMBus Slave Inhibit.
When this bit is set to logic 1, the SMBus does not generate an interrupt when slave events occur.
This effectively removes the SMBus slave from the bus. Master Mode interrupts are not affected.
0: SMBus Slave Mode enabled.
1: SMBus Slave Mode inhibited.
Bit5:
BUSY: SMBus Busy Indicator.
This bit is set to logic 1 by hardware when a transfer is in progress. It is cleared to logic 0 when a
STOP or free-timeout is sensed.
Bit4:
EXTHOLD: SMBus Setup and Hold Time Extension Enable.
This bit controls the SDA setup and hold times according to Table 13.2.
0: SDA Extended Setup and Hold Times disabled.
1: SDA Extended Setup and Hold Times enabled.
Bit3:
SMBTOE: SMBus SCL Timeout Detection Enable.
This bit enables SCL low timeout detection. If set to logic 1, the SMBus forces Timer 2 to reload
while SCL is high and allows Timer 2 to count when SCL goes low. Timer 2 should be programmed
to generate interrupts at 25 ms, and the Timer 2 interrupt service routine should reset SMBus commu-
nication.
Bit2:
SMBFTE: SMBus Free Timeout Detection Enable.
When this bit is set to logic 1, the bus will be considered free if SCL and SDA remain high for more
than 10 SMBus clock source periods.
Bits1-0:
SMBCS1-SMBCS0: SMBus Clock Source Selection.
These two bits select the SMBus clock source, which is used to generate the SMBus bit rate. The
selected device should be configured according to Equation 13.1.
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
ENSMB
INH
BUSY
EXTHOLD SMBTOE
SMBFTE
SMBCS1
SMBCS0
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address:
0xC1
SMBCS1
SMBCS0
SMBus Clock Source
0
0
Timer 0 Overflow
0
1
Timer 1 Overflow
1
0
Timer 2 High Byte Overflow
1
1
Timer 2 Low Byte Overflow
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 111
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
13.4.2. SMB0CN Control Register
SMB0CN is used to control the interface and to provide status information (see Figure 13.6). The higher four bits of
SMB0CN (MASTER, TXMODE, STA, and STO) form a status vector that can be used to jump to service routines.
MASTER and TXMODE indicate the master/slave state and transmit/receive modes, respectively.
The STA bit indicates that a START has been detected or generated since the last SMBus interrupt. When set to `1',
the STA bit will cause the SMBus to enter Master mode and generate a START when the bus becomes free. STA is
not cleared by hardware after the START is generated; it must be cleared by software.
As a master, writing the STO bit will cause the hardware to generate a STOP condition and end the current transfer
after the next ACK cycle. STO is cleared by hardware after the STOP condition is generated. As a slave, STO indi-
cates that a STOP condition has been detected since the last SMBus interrupt. STO is also used in slave mode to man-
age the transition from slave receiver to slave transmitter; see
Section 13.5.4
for details on this procedure.
If STO and STA are both set to `1' (while in Master Mode), a STOP followed by a START will be generated.
As a receiver, writing the ACK bit defines the outgoing ACK value; as a transmitter, reading the ACK bit indicates
the value received on the last ACK cycle. ACKRQ is set each time a byte is received, indicating that an outgoing
ACK value is needed. When ACKRQ is set, software should write the desired outgoing value to the ACK bit before
clearing SI. A NACK will be generated if software does not write the ACK bit before clearing SI. SDA will reflect
the defined ACK value immediately following a write to the ACK bit; however SCL will remain low until SI is
cleared. If a received slave address is not acknowledged, further slave events will be ignored until the next START is
detected.
The ARBLOST bit indicates that the interface has lost an arbitration. This may occur anytime the interface is trans-
mitting (master or slave). A lost arbitration while operating as a slave indicates a bus error condition. ARBLOST is
cleared by hardware each time SI is cleared.
The SI bit (SMBus Interrupt Flag) is set at the beginning and end of each transfer, after each byte frame, or when an
arbitration is lost; see Table 13.3 for more details.
Important Note About the SI Bit: The SMBus interface is stalled while SI is set; thus SCL is held low, and the bus
is stalled until software clears SI.
Table 13.3 lists all sources for hardware changes to the SMB0CN bits. Refer to Table 13.4 for SMBus status decoding
using the SMB0CN register.
Page 112
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
Figure 13.6. SMB0CN: SMBus Control Register
Bit7:
MASTER: SMBus Master/Slave Indicator.
This read-only bit indicates when the SMBus is operating as a master.
0: SMBus operating in Slave Mode.
1: SMBus operating in Master Mode.
Bit6:
TXMODE: SMBus Transmit Mode Indicator.
This read-only bit indicates when the SMBus is operating as a transmitter.
0: SMBus in Receiver Mode.
1: SMBus in Transmitter Mode.
Bit5:
STA: SMBus Start Flag.
Write:
0: No Start generated.
1: When operating as a master, a START condition is transmitted if the bus is free (If the bus is not
free, the START is transmitted after a STOP is received or a free timeout is detected). If STA is set by
software as an active Master, a repeated START will be generated after the next ACK cycle.
Read:
0: No Start or repeated Start detected.
1: Start or repeated Start detected.
Bit4:
STO: SMBus Stop Flag.
Write:
As a master, setting this bit to `1' causes a STOP condition to be transmitted after the next ACK
cycle. STO is cleared to `0' by hardware when the STOP is generated.
As a slave, software manages this bit when switching from Slave Receiver to Slave Transmitter
mode. See
Section 13.5.4
for details.
Read:
0: No Stop condition detected.
1: Stop condition detected (if in Slave Mode) or pending (if in Master Mode).
Bit3:
ACKRQ: SMBus Acknowledge Request.
This read-only bit is set to logic 1 when the SMBus has received a byte and needs the ACK bit to be
written with the correct ACK response value.
Bit2:
ARBLOST: SMBus Arbitration Lost Indicator.
This read-only bit is set to logic 1 when the SMBus loses arbitration while operating as a transmitter.
A lost arbitration while a slave indicates a bus error condition.
Bit1:
ACK: SMBus Acknowledge Flag.
This bit defines the out-going ACK level and records incoming ACK levels. It should be written each
time a byte is received (when ACKRQ=1), or read after each byte is transmitted.
0: A "not acknowledge" has been received (if in Transmitter Mode) OR will be transmitted (if in
Receiver Mode).
1: An "acknowledge" has been received (if in Transmitter Mode) OR will be transmitted (if in
Receiver Mode).
Bit0:
SI: SMBus Interrupt Flag.
This bit is set by hardware under the conditions listed in Table 13.3. SI must be cleared by software.
While SI is set, SCL is held low and the SMBus is stalled.
R
R
R/W
R/W
R
R
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
MASTER TXMODE
STA
STO
ACKRQ
ARBLOST
ACK
SI
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address:
(bit addressable)
0xC0
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 113
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
Table 13.3. Sources for Hardware Changes to SMB0CN
Bit
Set by Hardware When:
Cleared by Hardware When:
MASTER
A START is generated.
A STOP is generated.
Arbitration is lost.
TXMODE
START is generated.
The SMBus interface enters transmitter mode
(after SMB0DAT is written before the start of an
SMBus frame).
A START is detected.
Arbitration is lost.
SMB0DAT is not written before the start
of an SMBus frame.
STA
A START followed by an address byte is received. Must be cleared by software.
STO
A STOP is detected while addressed as a slave.
Arbitration is lost due to a detected STOP.
A pending STOP is generated.
ACKRQ
A byte has been received and an ACK response
value is needed.
After each ACK cycle.
ARBLOST
A repeated START is detected as a MASTER when
STA is low (unwanted repeated START).
SCL is sensed low while attempting to generate a
STOP or repeated START condition.
SDA is sensed low while transmitting a `1'
(excluding ACK bits).
Each time SI is cleared.
ACK
The incoming ACK value is low (ACKNOWL-
EDGE).
The incoming ACK value is high (NOT
ACKNOWLEDGE).
SI
A START has been generated.
Lost arbitration.
A byte has been transmitted and an ACK/NACK
received.
A byte has been received.
A START or repeated START followed by a slave
address + R/W has been received.
A STOP has been received.
Must be cleared by software.
Page 114
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
13.4.3. Data Register
The SMBus Data register SMB0DAT holds a byte of serial data to be transmitted or one that has just been received.
Software may safely read or write to the data register when the SI flag is set. Software should not attempt to access
the SMB0DAT register when the SMBus is enabled and the SI flag is cleared to logic 0, as the interface may be in the
process of shifting a byte of data into or out of the register.
Data in SMB0DAT is always shifted out MSB first. After a byte has been received, the first bit of received data is
located at the MSB of SMB0DAT. While data is being shifted out, data on the bus is simultaneously being shifted in.
SMB0DAT always contains the last data byte present on the bus. In the event of lost arbitration, the transition from
master transmitter to slave receiver is made with the correct data or address in SMB0DAT.
Figure 13.7. SMB0DAT: SMBus Data Register
Bits7-0:
SMB0DAT: SMBus Data.
The SMB0DAT register contains a byte of data to be transmitted on the SMBus serial interface or a
byte that has just been received on the SMBus serial interface. The CPU can read from or write to this
register whenever the SI serial interrupt flag (SMB0CN.0) is set to logic one. The serial data in the
register remains stable as long as the SI flag is set. When the SI flag is not set, the system may be in
the process of shifting data in/out and the CPU should not attempt to access this register.
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address:
0xC2
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 115
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
13.5.
SMBus Transfer Modes
The SMBus interface may be configured to operate as master and/or slave. At any particular time, it will be operating
in one of the following four modes: Master Transmitter, Master Receiver, Slave Transmitter, or Slave Receiver. The
SMBus interface enters Master Mode any time a START is generated, and remains in Master Mode until it loses arbi-
tration or generates a STOP. An SMBus interrupt is generated at the end of all SMBus byte frames; however, note that
the interrupt is generated before the ACK cycle when operating as a receiver, and after the ACK cycle when operating
as a transmitter.
13.5.1. Master Transmitter Mode
Serial data is transmitted on SDA while the serial clock is output on SCL. The SMBus interface generates the START
condition and transmits the first byte containing the address of the target slave and the data direction bit. In this case
the data direction bit (R/W) will be logic 0 (WRITE). The master then transmits one or more bytes of serial data.
After each byte is transmitted, an acknowledge bit is generated by the slave. The transfer is ended when the STO bit
is set and a STOP is generated. Note that the interface will switch to Master Receiver Mode if SMB0DAT is not writ-
ten following a Master Transmitter interrupt. Figure 13.8 shows a typical Master Transmitter sequence. Two transmit
data bytes are shown, though any number of bytes may be transmitted. Notice that the `data byte transferred' inter-
rupts occur after the ACK cycle in this mode.
A
A
A
S
W
P
Data Byte
Data Byte
SLA
S = START
P = STOP
A = ACK
W = WRITE
SLA = Slave Address
Received by SMBus
Interface
Transmitted by
SMBus Interface
Interrupt
Interrupt
Interrupt
Interrupt
Figure 13.8. Typical Master Transmitter Sequence
Page 116
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
13.5.2. Master Receiver Mode
Serial data is received on SDA while the serial clock is output on SCL. The SMBus interface generates the START
condition and transmits the first byte containing the address of the target slave and the data direction bit. In this case
the data direction bit (R/W) will be logic 1 (READ). Serial data is then received from the slave on SDA while the
SMBus outputs the serial clock. The slave transmits one or more bytes of serial data. After each byte is received,
ACKRQ is set to `1' and an interrupt is generated. Software must write the ACK bit (SMB0CN.1) to define the out-
going acknowledge value (Note: writing a `1' to the ACK bit generates an ACK; writing a `0' generates a NACK).
Software should write a `0' to the ACK bit after the last byte is received, to transmit a NACK. The interface exits
Master Receiver Mode after the STO bit is set and a STOP is generated. Note that the interface will switch to Master
Transmitter Mode if SMB0DAT is written while an active Master Receiver. Figure 13.9 shows a typical Master
Receiver sequence. Two received data bytes are shown, though any number of bytes may be received. Notice that the
`data byte transferred' interrupts occur before the ACK cycle in this mode.
Figure 13.9. Typical Master Receiver Sequence
Data Byte
Data Byte
A
N
A
S
R
P
SLA
S = START
P = STOP
A = ACK
N = NACK
R = READ
SLA = Slave Address
Received by SMBus
Interface
Transmitted by
SMBus Interface
Interrupt
Interrupt
Interrupt
Interrupt
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 117
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
13.5.3. Slave Receiver Mode
Serial data is received on SDA and the clock is received on SCL. When slave events are enabled (INH = 0), the inter-
face enters Slave Receiver Mode when a START followed by a slave address and direction bit (WRITE in this case)
is received. Upon entering Slave Receiver Mode, an interrupt is generated and the ACKRQ bit is set. Software
responds to the received slave address with an ACK, or ignores the received slave address with a NACK. If the
received slave address is ignored, slave interrupts will be inhibited until the next START is detected. If the received
slave address is acknowledged, zero or more data bytes are received. Software must write the ACK bit after each
received byte to ACK or NACK the received byte. The interface exits Slave Receiver Mode after receiving a STOP.
Note that the interface will switch to Slave Transmitter Mode if SMB0DAT is written while an active Slave Receiver;
see
Section 13.5.4
for details on this procedure. Figure 13.10 shows a typical Slave Receiver sequence. Two received
data bytes are shown, though any number of bytes may be received. Notice that the `data byte transferred' interrupts
occur before the ACK cycle in this mode.
P
W
SLA
S
Data Byte
Data Byte
A
A
A
S = START
P = STOP
A = ACK
R = READ
SLA = Slave Address
Received by SMBus
Interface
Transmitted by
SMBus Interface
Interrupt
Interrupt
Interrupt
Interrupt
Figure 13.10. Typical Slave Receiver Sequence
Page 118
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
13.5.4. Slave Transmitter Mode
Serial data is transmitted on SDA and the clock is received on SCL. When slave events are enabled (INH = 0), the
interface enters Slave Receiver Mode (to receive the slave address) when a START followed by a slave address and
direction bit (READ in this case) is received. Software responds to the received slave address with an ACK, or
ignores the received slave address with a NACK. If the received address is ignored, slave interrupts will be inhibited
until the next START is detected. If the received slave address is acknowledged, software should write data to
SMB0DAT to force the SMBus into Slave Transmitter Mode. The switch from Slave Receiver to Slave Transmitter
requires software management. Software should perform the steps outlined below only when a valid slave address is
received (indicated by the label "RX-to-TX Steps" in Figure 13.11).
Step 1. Set ACK to `1'.
Step 2. Write outgoing data to SMB0DAT.
Step 3. Check SMB0DAT.7; if `1', do not perform steps 4, 6 or 7.
Step 4. Set STO to `1'.
Step 5. Clear SI to `0'.
Step 6. Poll for TXMODE => `1'.
Step 7. Clear STO to `0' (must be done before the next ACK cycle).
The interface enters Slave Transmitter Mode and transmits one or more bytes of data (the above steps are only
required before the first byte of the transfer). After each byte is transmitted, the master sends an acknowledge bit; if
the acknowledge bit is an ACK, SMB0DAT should be written with the next data byte. If the acknowledge bit is a
NACK, SMB0DAT should not be written to before SI is cleared (Note: an error condition may be generated if
SMB0DAT is written following a received NACK while in Slave Transmitter Mode). The interface exits Slave Trans-
mitter Mode after receiving a STOP. Note that the interface will switch to Slave Receiver Mode if SMB0DAT is not
written following a Slave Transmitter interrupt. Figure 13.11 shows a typical Slave Transmitter sequence. Two trans-
mitted data bytes are shown, though any number of bytes may be transmitted. Notice that the `data byte transferred'
interrupts occur after the ACK cycle in this mode.
P
R
SLA
S
Data Byte
Data Byte
A
N
A
S = START
P = STOP
N = NACK
W = WRITE
SLA = Slave Address
Received by SMBus
Interface
Transmitted by
SMBus Interface
Interrupt
Interrupt
Interrupt
Interrupt
Perform RX-to-TX
Steps Here
Figure 13.11. Typical Slave Transmitter Sequence
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 119
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
13.6.
SMBus Status Decoding
The current SMBus status can be easily decoded using the SMB0CN register. In the table below, STATUS VECTOR
refers to the four upper bits of SMB0CN: MASTER, TXMODE, STA, and STO. Note that the shown response
options are only the typical responses; application-specific procedures are allowed as long as they conform with the
SMBus specification. Highlighted responses are allowed but do not conform to the SMBus specification.
Table 13.4. SMBus Status Decoding
MO
D
E
VALUES READ
CURRENT SMBUS STATE
TYPICAL RESPONSE
OPTIONS
VALUES
WRITTEN
S
T
AT
US
VE
C
T
O
R
ACKRQ
ARB
L
O
ST
ACK
ST
A
ST
O
ACK
M
A
ST
E
R
T
RANSM
I
T
T
E
R
1110
0
0
X A master START was generated.
Load slave address + R/W into
SMB0DAT.
0
0
X
1100
0
0
0
A master data or address byte was
transmitted; NACK received.
Set STA to restart transfer.
1
0
X
Abort transfer.
0
1
X
0
0
1
A master data or address byte was
transmitted; ACK received.
Load next data byte into
SMB0DAT
0
0
X
End transfer with STOP
0
1
X
End transfer with STOP and
start another transfer.
1
1
X
Send repeated START
1
0
X
Switch to Master Receiver
Mode (clear SI without writing
new data to SMB0DAT).
0
0
X
MA
S
T
E
R
R
E
C
E
I
V
ER
1000
1
0
X
A master data byte was received;
ACK requested.
Acknowledge received byte;
Read SMB0DAT.
0
0
1
Send NACK to indicate last
byte, and send STOP.
0
1
0
Send NACK to indicate last
byte, and send STOP followed
by START.
1
1
0
Send ACK followed by
repeated START.
1
0
1
Send NACK to indicate last
byte, and send repeated START.
1
0
0
Send ACK and switch to Mas-
ter Transmitter Mode (write
to SMB0DAT before clearing
SI).
0
0
1
Send NACK and switch to
Master Transmitter Mode
(write to SMB0DAT before
clearing SI).
0
0
0
Page 120
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
SL
AVE
T
RANS
M
I
T
T
E
R
0100
0
0
0
A slave byte was transmitted; NACK
received.
No action required (expecting
STOP condition).
0
0
X
0
0
1
A slave byte was transmitted; ACK
received.
Load SMB0DAT with next data
byte to transmit.
0
0
X
0
1
X
A Slave byte was transmitted; error
detected.
No action required (expecting
Master to end transfer).
0
0
X
0101
0
X
X
A STOP was detected while an
addressed Slave Transmitter.
No action required (transfer
complete).
0
0
X
Table 13.4. SMBus Status Decoding
MOD
E
VALUES READ
CURRENT SMBUS STATE
TYPICAL RESPONSE
OPTIONS
VALUES
WRITTEN
S
T
AT
US
VE
C
T
O
R
ACKRQ
ARB
L
O
S
T
ACK
ST
A
ST
O
ACK
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 121
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
SL
AVE
R
E
CE
IVE
R
0010
1
0
X
A slave address was received; ACK
requested.
Acknowledge received address
(received slave address match,
R/W bit = READ).
0
0
1
Do not acknowledge received
address.
0
0
0
Acknowledge received address,
and switch to transmitter mode
(received slave address match,
R/W bit = WRITE); see
Section
13.5.4
for procedure.
0
0
1
1
1
X
Lost arbitration as master; slave
address received; ACK requested.
Acknowledge received address
(received slave address match,
R/W bit = READ).
0
0
1
Do not acknowledge received
address.
0
0
0
Acknowledge received address,
and switch to transmitter mode
(received slave address match,
R/W bit = WRITE); see
Section
13.5.4
for procedure.
0
0
1
Reschedule failed transfer; do
not acknowledge received
address
1
0
0
0010
0
1
X
Lost arbitration while attempting a
repeated START.
Abort failed transfer.
0
0
X
Reschedule failed transfer.
1
0
X
0001
1
1
X
Lost arbitration while attempting a
STOP.
No action required (transfer
complete/aborted).
0
0
0
0
0
X
A STOP was detected while an
addressed slave receiver.
No action required (transfer
complete).
0
0
X
0
1
X
Lost arbitration due to a detected
STOP.
Abort transfer.
0
0
X
Reschedule failed transfer.
1
0
X
0000
1
0
X
A slave byte was received; ACK
requested.
Acknowledge received byte;
Read SMB0DAT.
0
0
1
Do not acknowledge received
byte.
0
0
0
1
1
X
Lost arbitration while transmitting a
data byte as master.
Abort failed transfer.
0
0
0
Reschedule failed transfer.
1
0
0
Table 13.4. SMBus Status Decoding
MOD
E
VALUES READ
CURRENT SMBUS STATE
TYPICAL RESPONSE
OPTIONS
VALUES
WRITTEN
S
T
AT
US
VE
C
T
O
R
ACKRQ
ARB
L
O
S
T
ACK
ST
A
ST
O
ACK
Page 122
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
Notes
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 123
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
14.
UART0
UART0 is an asynchronous, full duplex serial port offering modes 1 and 3 of the standard 8051 UART. Enhanced
baud rate support allows a wide range of clock sources to generate standard baud rates (details in
Section
"14.1. Enhanced Baud Rate Generation" on page 124
). Received data buffering allows UART0 to start reception
of a second incoming data byte before software has finished reading the previous data byte.
UART0 has two associated SFRs: Serial Control Register 0 (SCON0) and Serial Data Buffer 0 (SBUF0). The single
SBUF0 location provides access to both transmit and receive registers. Reading SBUF0 accesses the buffered
Receive register; writing SBUF0 accesses the Transmit register.
With UART0 interrupts enabled, an interrupt is generated each time a transmit is completed (TI0 is set in SCON0), or
a data byte has been received (RI0 is set in SCON0). The UART0 interrupt flags are not cleared by hardware when
the CPU vectors to the interrupt service routine. They must be cleared manually by software, allowing software to
determine the cause of the UART0 interrupt (transmit complete or receive complete).
Figure 14.1. UART0 Block Diagram
UART Baud
Rate Generator
RI
SCON0
RI
0
TI
0
RB
8
0
TB
80
RE
N0
MC
E
0
S0
M
O
D
E
Tx Control
Tx Clock
Send
SBUF
(TX Shift)
Start
Data
Write to
SBUF
Crossbar
TX
Shift
Zero Detector
Tx IRQ
SET
Q
D
CLR
Stop Bit
TB8
SFR Bus
Serial
Port
Interrupt
TI
Port I/O
Rx Control
Start
Rx Clock
Load
SBUF
Shift
0x1FF
RB8
Rx IRQ
Input Shift Register
(9 bits)
Load SBUF0
Read
SBUF
SFR Bus
Crossbar
RX
SBUF
(RX Latch)
Page 124
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
14.1.
Enhanced Baud Rate Generation
The UART0 baud rate is generated by Timer 1 in 8-bit auto-reload mode. The TX clock is generated by TL1; the RX
clock is generated by a copy of TL1 (shown as RX Timer in Figure 14.2), which is not user-accessible. Both TX and
RX Timer overflows are divided by two to generate the TX and RX baud rates. The RX Timer runs when Timer 1 is
enabled, and uses the same reload value (TH1). However, an RX Timer reload is forced when a START condition is
detected on the RX pin. This allows a receive to begin any time a START is detected, independent of the TX Timer
state.
Timer 1 should be configured for Mode 2, 8-bit auto-reload (see
Section "15.1.3. Mode 2: 8-bit Counter/Timer
with Auto-Reload" on page 135
). The Timer 1 reload value should be set so that overflows will occur at two times
the desired UART baud rate frequency. Note that Timer 1 may be clocked by one of five sources: SYSCLK,
SYSCLK / 4, SYSCLK / 12, SYSCLK / 48, or the external oscillator clock / 8. For any given Timer 1 clock source,
the UART0 baud rate is determined by Equation 14.1.
Where T1
CLK
is the frequency of the clock supplied to Timer 1, and T1H is the high byte of Timer 1 (reload value).
Timer 1 clock frequency is selected as described in
Section "15.2. Timer 2" on page 141
. A quick reference for typ-
ical baud rates and system clock frequencies is given in Tables 14.1 through 14.6. Note that the internal oscillator
may still generate the system clock when the external oscillator is driving Timer 1 (see
Section "15.1. Timer 0 and
Timer 1" on page 133
for more details).
Figure 14.2. UART0 Baud Rate Logic
RX Timer
Start
Detected
Overflow
Overflow
TH1
TL1
TX Clock
2
RX Clock
2
Timer 1
UART0
Equation 14.1. UART0 Baud Rate
UartBaudRate
T1
CLK
256
T1H
(
)
-------------------------------
1
2
---
=
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 125
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
14.2.
Operational Modes
UART0 provides standard asynchronous, full duplex communication. The UART mode (8-bit or 9-bit) is selected by
the S0MODE bit (SCON0.7). Typical UART connection options are shown below.
14.2.1. 8-Bit UART
8-Bit UART mode uses a total of 10 bits per data byte: one start bit, eight data bits (LSB first), and one stop bit. Data
are transmitted LSB first from the TX pin and received at the RX pin. On receive, the eight data bits are stored in
SBUF0 and the stop bit goes into RB80 (SCON0.2).
Data transmission begins when software writes a data byte to the SBUF0 register. The TI0 Transmit Interrupt Flag
(SCON0.1) is set at the end of the transmission (the beginning of the stop-bit time). Data reception can begin any
time after the REN0 Receive Enable bit (SCON0.4) is set to logic 1. After the stop bit is received, the data byte will
be loaded into the SBUF0 receive register if the following conditions are met: RI0 must be logic 0, and if MCE0 is
logic 1, the stop bit must be logic 1. In the event of a receive data overrun, the first received 8 bits are latched into the
SBUF0 receive register and the following overrun data bits are lost.
If these conditions are met, the eight bits of data is stored in SBUF0, the stop bit is stored in RB80 and the RI0 flag is
set. If these conditions are not met, SBUF0 and RB80 will not be loaded and the RI0 flag will not be set. An interrupt
will occur if enabled when either TI0 or RI0 is set.
Figure 14.3. UART Interconnect Diagram
OR
RS-232
C8051Fxxx
RS-232
LEVEL
XLTR
TX
RX
C8051Fxxx
RX
TX
MCU
RX
TX
Figure 14.4. 8-Bit UART Timing Diagram
D1
D0
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
START
BIT
MARK
STOP
BIT
BIT TIMES
BIT SAMPLING
SPACE
Page 126
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
14.2.2. 9-Bit UART
9-bit UART mode uses a total of eleven bits per data byte: a start bit, 8 data bits (LSB first), a programmable ninth
data bit, and a stop bit. The state of the ninth transmit data bit is determined by the value in TB80 (SCON0.3), which
is assigned by user software. It can be assigned the value of the parity flag (bit P in register PSW) for error detection,
or used in multiprocessor communications. On receive, the ninth data bit goes into RB80 (SCON0.2) and the stop bit
is ignored.
Data transmission begins when an instruction writes a data byte to the SBUF0 register. The TI0 Transmit Interrupt
Flag (SCON0.1) is set at the end of the transmission (the beginning of the stop-bit time). Data reception can begin
any time after the REN0 Receive Enable bit (SCON0.4) is set to `1'. After the stop bit is received, the data byte will
be loaded into the SBUF0 receive register if the following conditions are met: (1) RI0 must be logic 0, and (2) if
MCE0 is logic 1, the 9th bit must be logic 1 (when MCE0 is logic 0, the state of the ninth data bit is unimportant). If
these conditions are met, the eight bits of data are stored in SBUF0, the ninth bit is stored in RB80, and the RI0 flag is
set to `1'. If the above conditions are not met, SBUF0 and RB80 will not be loaded and the RI0 flag will not be set to
`1'. A UART0 interrupt will occur if enabled when either TI0 or RI0 is set to `1'.
Figure 14.5. 9-Bit UART Timing Diagram
D1
D0
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
START
BIT
MARK
STOP
BIT
BIT TIMES
BIT SAMPLING
SPACE
D8
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 127
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
14.3.
Multiprocessor Communications
9-Bit UART mode supports multiprocessor communication between a master processor and one or more slave pro-
cessors by special use of the ninth data bit. When a master processor wants to transmit to one or more slaves, it first
sends an address byte to select the target(s). An address byte differs from a data byte in that its ninth bit is logic 1; in
a data byte, the ninth bit is always set to logic 0.
Setting the MCE0 bit (SCON.5) of a slave processor configures its UART such that when a stop bit is received, the
UART will generate an interrupt only if the ninth bit is logic one (RB80 = 1) signifying an address byte has been
received. In the UART interrupt handler, software will compare the received address with the slave's own assigned 8-
bit address. If the addresses match, the slave will clear its MCE0 bit to enable interrupts on the reception of the fol-
lowing data byte(s). Slaves that weren't addressed leave their MCE0 bits set and do not generate interrupts on the
reception of the following data bytes, thereby ignoring the data. Once the entire message is received, the addressed
slave resets its MCE0 bit to ignore all transmissions until it receives the next address byte.
Multiple addresses can be assigned to a single slave and/or a single address can be assigned to multiple slaves,
thereby enabling "broadcast" transmissions to more than one slave simultaneously. The master processor can be con-
figured to receive all transmissions or a protocol can be implemented such that the master/slave role is temporarily
reversed to enable half-duplex transmission between the original master and slave(s).
Figure 14.6. UART Multi-Processor Mode Interconnect Diagram
Master
Device
Slave
Device
TX
RX
RX
TX
Slave
Device
RX
TX
Slave
Device
RX
TX
+5V
Page 128
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
Figure 14.7. SCON0: Serial Port 0 Control Register
Bit7:
S0MODE: Serial Port 0 Operation Mode.
This bit selects the UART0 Operation Mode.
0: Mode 0: 8-bit UART with Variable Baud Rate
1: Mode 1: 9-bit UART with Variable Baud Rate
Bit6:
UNUSED. Read = 1b. Write = don't care.
Bit5:
MCE0: Multiprocessor Communication Enable.
The function of this bit is dependent on the Serial Port 0 Operation Mode.
Mode 0: Checks for valid stop bit.
0: Logic level of stop bit is ignored.
1: RI0 will only be activated if stop bit is logic level 1.
Mode 1: Multiprocessor Communications Enable.
0: Logic level of ninth bit is ignored.
1: RI0 is set and an interrupt is generated only when the ninth bit is logic 1.
Bit4:
REN0: Receive Enable.
This bit enables/disables the UART receiver.
0: UART0 reception disabled.
1: UART0 reception enabled.
Bit3:
TB80: Ninth Transmission Bit.
The logic level of this bit will be assigned to the ninth transmission bit in 9-bit UART Mode. It is not
used in 8-bit UART Mode. Set or cleared by software as required.
Bit2:
RB80: Ninth Receive Bit.
RB80 is assigned the value of the STOP bit in Mode 0; it is assigned the value of the 9th data bit in
Mode 1.
Bit1:
TI0: Transmit Interrupt Flag.
Set by hardware when a byte of data has been transmitted by UART0 (after the 8th bit in 8-bit UART
Mode, or at the beginning of the STOP bit in 9-bit UART Mode). When the UART0 interrupt is
enabled, setting this bit causes the CPU to vector to the UART0 interrupt service routine. This bit
must be cleared manually by software
Bit0:
RI0: Receive Interrupt Flag.
Set to `1' by hardware when a byte of data has been received by UART0 (set at the STOP bit sam-
pling time). When the UART0 interrupt is enabled, setting this bit to `1' causes the CPU to vector to
the UART0 interrupt service routine. This bit must be cleared manually by software.
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
S0MODE
-
MCE0
REN0
TB80
RB80
TI0
RI0
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address:
(bit addressable)
0x98
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 129
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
Figure 14.8. SBUF0: Serial (UART0) Port Data Buffer Register
Bits7-0:
SBUF0[7:0]: Serial Data Buffer Bits 7-0 (MSB-LSB)
This SFR accesses two registers; a transmit shift register and a receive latch register. When data is
written to SBUF0, it goes to the transmit shift register and is held for serial transmission. Writing a
byte to SBUF0 is what initiates the transmission. A read of SBUF0 returns the contents of the receive
latch.
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address:
0x99
Page 130
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
Table 14.1. Timer Settings for Standard Baud Rates Using The Internal Oscillator
Frequency: 24.5 MHz
Target
Baud Rate
(bps)
Baud Rate
% Error
Oscillator
Divide
Factor
Timer Clock
Source
SCA1-SCA0
(pre-scale select)
T1M
Timer 1
Reload
Value (hex)
SYS
C
L
K
f
r
om
In
ternal
Os
c.
230400
-0.32%
106
SYSCLK
XX
1
0xCB
115200
-0.32%
212
SYSCLK
XX
1
0x96
57600
0.15%
426
SYSCLK
XX
1
0x2B
28800
-0.32%
848
SYSCLK / 4
01
0
0x96
14400
0.15%
1704
SYSCLK / 12
00
0
0xB9
9600
-0.32%
2544
SYSCLK / 12
00
0
0x96
2400
-0.32%
10176
SYSCLK / 48
10
0
0x96
1200
0.15%
20448
SYSCLK / 48
10
0
0x2B
X = Don't care
SCA1-SCA0 and T1M bit definitions can be found in
Section 15.1
.
Table 14.2. Timer Settings for Standard Baud Rates Using an External Oscillator
Frequency: 25.0 MHz
Target
Baud Rate
(bps)
Baud Rate
% Error
Oscillator
Divide
Factor
Timer Clock
Source
SCA1-SCA0
(pre-scale select)
T1M
Timer 1
Reload
Value (hex)
SY
SCL
K
f
r
om
Extern
al
O
s
c.
230400
-0.47%
108
SYSCLK
XX
1
0xCA
115200
0.45%
218
SYSCLK
XX
1
0x93
57600
-0.01%
434
SYSCLK
XX
1
0x27
28800
0.45%
872
SYSCLK / 4
01
0
0x93
14400
-0.01%
1736
SYSCLK / 4
01
0
0x27
9600
0.15%
2608
EXTCLK / 8
11
0
0x5D
2400
0.45%
10464
SYSCLK / 48
10
0
0x93
1200
-0.01%
20832
SYSCLK / 48
10
0
0x27
SY
S
C
L
K
f
r
om
Inter
n
al
Os
c.
57600
-0.47%
432
EXTCLK / 8
11
0
0xE5
28800
-0.47%
864
EXTCLK / 8
11
0
0xCA
14400
0.45%
1744
EXTCLK / 8
11
0
0x93
9600
0.15%
2608
EXTCLK / 8
11
0
0x5D
X = Don't care
SCA1-SCA0 and T1M bit definitions can be found in
Section 15.1
.
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 131
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
Table 14.3. Timer Settings for Standard Baud Rates Using an External Oscillator
Frequency: 22.1184 MHz
Target
Baud Rate
(bps)
Baud Rate
% Error
Oscillator
Divide
Factor
Timer Clock
Source
SCA1-SCA0
(pre-scale select)
T1M
Timer 1
Reload
Value (hex)
SYS
C
L
K
f
r
om
Extern
al
O
s
c.
230400
0.00%
96
SYSCLK
XX
1
0xD0
115200
0.00%
192
SYSCLK
XX
1
0xA0
57600
0.00%
384
SYSCLK
XX
1
0x40
28800
0.00%
768
SYSCLK / 12
00
0
0xE0
14400
0.00%
1536
SYSCLK / 12
00
0
0xC0
9600
0.00%
2304
SYSCLK / 12
00
0
0xA0
2400
0.00%
9216
SYSCLK / 48
10
0
0xA0
1200
0.00%
18432
SYSCLK / 48
10
0
0x40
SYSC
L
K
f
r
o
m
I
n
tern
al
O
s
c.
230400
0.00%
96
EXTCLK / 8
11
0
0xFA
115200
0.00%
192
EXTCLK / 8
11
0
0xF4
57600
0.00%
384
EXTCLK / 8
11
0
0xE8
28800
0.00%
768
EXTCLK / 8
11
0
0xD0
14400
0.00%
1536
EXTCLK / 8
11
0
0xA0
9600
0.00%
2304
EXTCLK / 8
11
0
0x70
X = Don't care
SCA1-SCA0 and T1M bit definitions can be found in
Section 15.1
.
Table 14.4. Timer Settings for Standard Baud Rates Using an External Oscillator
Frequency: 18.432 MHz
Target
Baud Rate
(bps)
Baud Rate
% Error
Oscillator
Divide
Factor
Timer Clock
Source
SCA1-SCA0
(pre-scale select)
T1M
Timer 1
Reload
Value (hex)
SYS
C
L
K
f
r
om
Extern
al
O
s
c.
230400
0.00%
80
SYSCLK
XX
1
0xD8
115200
0.00%
160
SYSCLK
XX
1
0xB0
57600
0.00%
320
SYSCLK
XX
1
0x60
28800
0.00%
640
SYSCLK / 4
01
0
0xB0
14400
0.00%
1280
SYSCLK / 4
01
0
0x60
9600
0.00%
1920
SYSCLK / 12
00
0
0xB0
2400
0.00%
7680
SYSCLK / 48
10
0
0xB0
1200
0.00%
15360
SYSCLK / 48
10
0
0x60
SYSC
L
K
f
r
o
m
In
t
e
r
n
al
O
s
c
.
230400
0.00%
80
EXTCLK / 8
11
0
0xFB
115200
0.00%
160
EXTCLK / 8
11
0
0xF6
57600
0.00%
320
EXTCLK / 8
11
0
0xEC
28800
0.00%
640
EXTCLK / 8
11
0
0xD8
14400
0.00%
1280
EXTCLK / 8
11
0
0xB0
9600
0.00%
1920
EXTCLK / 8
11
0
0x88
X = Don't care
SCA1-SCA0 and T1M bit definitions can be found in
Section 15.1
.
Page 132
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
Table 14.5. Timer Settings for Standard Baud Rates Using an External Oscillator
Frequency: 11.0592 MHz
Target
Baud Rate
(bps)
Baud Rate
% Error
Oscillator
Divide
Factor
Timer Clock
Source
SCA1-SCA0
(pre-scale select)
T1M
Timer 1
Reload
Value (hex)
SYS
C
L
K
f
r
om
Extern
al
O
s
c.
230400
0.00%
48
SYSCLK
XX
1
0xE8
115200
0.00%
96
SYSCLK
XX
1
0xD0
57600
0.00%
192
SYSCLK
XX
1
0xA0
28800
0.00%
384
SYSCLK
XX
1
0x40
14400
0.00%
768
SYSCLK / 12
00
0
0xE0
9600
0.00%
1152
SYSCLK / 12
00
0
0xD0
2400
0.00%
4608
SYSCLK / 12
00
0
0x40
1200
0.00%
9216
SYSCLK / 48
10
0
0xA0
SYSC
L
K
f
r
o
m
I
n
tern
al
O
s
c.
230400
0.00%
48
EXTCLK / 8
11
0
0xFD
115200
0.00%
96
EXTCLK / 8
11
0
0xFA
57600
0.00%
192
EXTCLK / 8
11
0
0xF4
28800
0.00%
384
EXTCLK / 8
11
0
0xE8
14400
0.00%
768
EXTCLK / 8
11
0
0xD0
9600
0.00%
1152
EXTCLK / 8
11
0
0xB8
X = Don't care
SCA1-SCA0 and T1M bit definitions can be found in
Section 15.1
.
Table 14.6. Timer Settings for Standard Baud Rates Using an External Oscillator
Frequency: 3.6864 MHz
Target
Baud Rate
(bps)
Baud Rate
% Error
Oscillator
Divide
Factor
Timer Clock
Source
SCA1-SCA0
(pre-scale select)
T1M
Timer 1
Reload
Value (hex)
SYS
C
L
K
f
r
om
Extern
al
O
s
c.
230400
0.00%
16
SYSCLK
XX
1
0xF8
115200
0.00%
32
SYSCLK
XX
1
0xF0
57600
0.00%
64
SYSCLK
XX
1
0xE0
28800
0.00%
128
SYSCLK
XX
1
0xC0
14400
0.00%
256
SYSCLK
XX
1
0x80
9600
0.00%
384
SYSCLK
XX
1
0x40
2400
0.00%
1536
SYSCLK / 12
00
0
0xC0
1200
0.00%
3072
SYSCLK / 12
00
0
0x80
SYSC
L
K
f
r
o
m
In
t
e
r
n
al
O
s
c
.
230400
0.00%
16
EXTCLK / 8
11
0
0xFF
115200
0.00%
32
EXTCLK / 8
11
0
0xFE
57600
0.00%
64
EXTCLK / 8
11
0
0xFC
28800
0.00%
128
EXTCLK / 8
11
0
0xF8
14400
0.00%
256
EXTCLK / 8
11
0
0xF0
9600
0.00%
384
EXTCLK / 8
11
0
0xE8
X = Don't care
SCA1-SCA0 and T1M bit definitions can be found in
Section 15.1
.
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 133
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
15.
TIMERS
Each MCU includes 3 counter/timers: two are 16-bit counter/timers compatible with those found in the standard
8051, and one is a 16-bit auto-reload timer for use with the ADC, SMBus, or for general purpose use. These timers
can be used to measure time intervals, count external events and generate periodic interrupt requests. Timer 0 and
Timer 1 are nearly identical and have four primary modes of operation. Timer 2 offers 16-bit and split 8-bit timer
functionality with auto-reload.
Timers 0 and 1 may be clocked by one of five sources, determined by the Timer Mode Select bits (T1M-T0M) and
the Clock Scale bits (SCA1-SCA0). The Clock Scale bits define a pre-scaled clock from which Timer 0 and/or
Timer 1 may be clocked (See Figure 15.6 for pre-scaled clock selection).
Timer 0/1 may then be configured to use this pre-scaled clock signal or the system clock. Timer 2 may be clocked by
the system clock, the system clock divided by 12, or the external oscillator clock source divided by 8.
Timer 0 and Timer 1 may also be operated as counters. When functioning as a counter, a counter/timer register is
incremented on each high-to-low transition at the selected input pin. Events with a frequency of up to one-fourth the
system clock's frequency can be counted. The input signal need not be periodic, but it should be held at a given level
for at least two full system clock cycles to ensure the level is properly sampled.
15.1.
Timer 0 and Timer 1
Each timer is implemented as 16-bit register accessed as two separate bytes: a low byte (TL0 or TL1) and a high byte
(TH0 or TH1). The Counter/Timer Control register (TCON) is used to enable Timer 0 and Timer 1 as well as indicate
their status. Timer 0 interrupts can be enabled by setting the ET0 bit in the IE regitser (
Section "8.3.5. Interrupt
Register Descriptions" on page 70
); Timer 1 interrupts can be enabled by setting the ET1 bit in the IE register (
Sec-
tion 8.3.5
). Both counter/timers operate in one of four primary modes selected by setting the Mode Select bits T1M1-
T0M0 in the Counter/Timer Mode register (TMOD). Each timer can be configured independently. Each operating
mode is described below.
15.1.1. Mode 0: 13-bit Counter/Timer
Timer 0 and Timer 1 operate as 13-bit counter/timers in Mode 0. The following describes the configuration and oper-
ation of Timer 0. However, both timers operate identically, and Timer 1 is configured in the same manner as
described for Timer 0.
The TH0 register holds the eight MSBs of the 13-bit counter/timer. TL0 holds the five LSBs in bit positions TL0.4-
TL0.0. The three upper bits of TL0 (TL0.7-TL0.5) are indeterminate and should be masked out or ignored when read-
ing. As the 13-bit timer register increments and overflows from 0x1FFF (all ones) to 0x0000, the timer overflow flag
TF0 (TCON.5) is set and an interrupt will occur if Timer 0 interrupts are enabled.
The C/T0 bit (TMOD.2) selects the counter/timer's clock source. When C/T0 is set to logic 1, high-to-low transitions
at the selected Timer 0 input pin (T0) increment the timer register (Refer to
Section "12.1. Priority Crossbar
Decoder" on page 96
for information on selecting and configuring external I/O pins). Clearing C/T selects the clock
defined by the T0M bit (CKCON.3). When T0M is set, Timer 0 is clocked by the system clock. When T0M is
cleared, Timer 0 is clocked by the source selected by the Clock Scale bits in CKCON (see Figure 15.6).
Timer 0 and Timer 1 Modes:
Timer 2 Modes:
13-bit counter/timer
16-bit timer with auto-reload
16-bit counter/timer
8-bit counter/timer with auto-reload
Two 8-bit timers with auto-reload
Two 8-bit counter/timers (Timer 0 only)
Page 134
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
Setting the TR0 bit (TCON.4) enables the timer when either GATE0 (TMOD.3) is logic 0 or the input signal /INT0 is
active as defined by bit IN0PL in register INT01CF (see Figure 8.14). Setting GATE0 to `1' allows the timer to be
controlled by the external input signal /INT0 (see
Section "8.3.5. Interrupt Register Descriptions" on page 70
),
facilitating pulse width measurements.
Setting TR0 does not force the timer to reset. The timer registers should be loaded with the desired initial value before
the timer is enabled.
TL1 and TH1 form the 13-bit register for Timer 1 in the same manner as described above for TL0 and TH0. Timer 1
is configured and controlled using the relevant TCON and TMOD bits just as with Timer 0. The input signal /INT1 is
used with Timer 1; the /INT1 polarity is defined by bit IN1PL in register INT01CF (see Figure 8.14).
15.1.2. Mode 1: 16-bit Counter/Timer
Mode 1 operation is the same as Mode 0, except that the counter/timer registers use all 16 bits. The counter/timers are
enabled and configured in Mode 1 in the same manner as for Mode 0.
TR0
GATE0
/INT0
Counter/Timer
0
X
X
Disabled
1
0
X
Enabled
1
1
0
Disabled
1
1
1
Enabled
X = Don't Care
Figure 15.1. T0 Mode 0 Block Diagram
TCLK
TL0
(5 bits)
TH0
(8 bits)
TC
ON
TF0
TR0
TR1
TF1
IE1
IT1
IE0
IT0
Interrupt
TR0
0
1
0
1
SYSCLK
Pre-scaled Clock
CKCON
T
2
M
H
S
C
A
0
S
C
A
1
T
2
M
L
T
1
M
T
0
M
TMOD
T
1
M
1
T
1
M
0
C
/
T
1
G
A
T
E
1
G
A
T
E
0
C
/
T
0
T
0
M
1
T
0
M
0
GATE0
/INT0
T0
Crossbar
INT01CF
I
N
1
S
L
1
I
N
1
S
L
0
I
N
1
S
L
2
I
N
1
P
L
I
N
0
P
L
I
N
0
S
L
2
I
N
0
S
L
1
I
N
0
S
L
0
IN0PL
XOR
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 135
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
15.1.3. Mode 2: 8-bit Counter/Timer with Auto-Reload
Mode 2 configures Timer 0 and Timer 1 to operate as 8-bit counter/timers with automatic reload of the start value.
TL0 holds the count and TH0 holds the reload value. When the counter in TL0 overflows from all ones to 0x00, the
timer overflow flag TF0 (TCON.5) is set and the counter in TL0 is reloaded from TH0. If Timer 0 interrupts are
enabled, an interrupt will occur when the TF0 flag is set. The reload value in TH0 is not changed. TL0 must be initial-
ized to the desired value before enabling the timer for the first count to be correct. When in Mode 2, Timer 1 operates
identically to Timer 0.
Both counter/timers are enabled and configured in Mode 2 in the same manner as Mode 0. Setting the TR0 bit
(TCON.4) enables the timer when either GATE0 (TMOD.3) is logic 0 or when the input signal /INT0 is active as
defined by bit IN0PL in register INT01CF (see
Section "8.3.2. External Interrupts" on page 68
for details on the
external input signals /INT0 and /INT1).
Figure 15.2. T0 Mode 2 Block Diagram
TCLK
TMOD
T
1
M
1
T
1
M
0
C
/
T
1
G
A
T
E
1
G
A
T
E
0
C
/
T
0
T
0
M
1
T
0
M
0
TCON
TF0
TR0
TR1
TF1
IE1
IT1
IE0
IT0
Interrupt
TL0
(8 bits)
Reload
TH0
(8 bits)
0
1
0
1
SYSCLK
Pre-scaled Clock
CKCON
T
2
M
H
S
C
A
0
S
C
A
1
T
2
M
L
T
1
M
T
0
M
INT01CF
I
N
1
S
L
1
I
N
1
S
L
0
I
N
1
S
L
2
I
N
1
P
L
I
N
0
P
L
I
N
0
S
L
2
I
N
0
S
L
1
I
N
0
S
L
0
TR0
GATE0
IN0PL
XOR
/INT0
T0
Crossbar
Page 136
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
15.1.4. Mode 3: Two 8-bit Counter/Timers (Timer 0 Only)
In Mode 3, Timer 0 is configured as two separate 8-bit counter/timers held in TL0 and TH0. The counter/timer in TL0
is controlled using the Timer 0 control/status bits in TCON and TMOD: TR0, C/T0, GATE0 and TF0. TL0 can use
either the system clock or an external input signal as its timebase. The TH0 register is restricted to a timer function
sourced by the system clock or prescaled clock. TH0 is enabled using the Timer 1 run control bit TR1. TH0 sets the
Timer 1 overflow flag TF1 on overflow and thus controls the Timer 1 interrupt.
Timer 1 is inactive in Mode 3. When Timer 0 is operating in Mode 3, Timer 1 can be operated in Modes 0, 1 or 2, but
cannot be clocked by external signals nor set the TF1 flag and generate an interrupt. However, the Timer 1 overflow
can be used to generate baud rates for the SMBus and/or UART, and/or initiate ADC conversions. While Timer 0 is
operating in Mode 3, Timer 1 run control is handled through its mode settings. To run Timer 1 while Timer 0 is in
Mode 3, set the Timer 1 Mode as 0, 1, or 2. To disable Timer 1, configure it for Mode 3.
Figure 15.3. T0 Mode 3 Block Diagram
TL0
(8 bits)
TMOD
0
1
TC
ON
TF0
TR0
TR1
TF1
IE1
IT1
IE0
IT0
Interrupt
Interrupt
0
1
SYSCLK
Pre-scaled Clock
TR1
TH0
(8 bits)
CKCON
T
2
M
H
S
C
A
0
S
C
A
1
T
2
M
L
T
1
M
T
0
M
T
1
M
1
T
1
M
0
C
/
T
1
G
A
T
E
1
G
A
T
E
0
C
/
T
0
T
0
M
1
T
0
M
0
TR0
GATE0
IN0PL
XOR
/INT0
T0
Crossbar
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 137
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
Figure 15.4. TCON: Timer Control Register
Bit7:
TF1: Timer 1 Overflow Flag.
Set by hardware when Timer 1 overflows. This flag can be cleared by software but is automatically
cleared when the CPU vectors to the Timer 1 interrupt service routine.
0: No Timer 1 overflow detected.
1: Timer 1 has overflowed.
Bit6:
TR1: Timer 1 Run Control.
0: Timer 1 disabled.
1: Timer 1 enabled.
Bit5:
TF0: Timer 0 Overflow Flag.
Set by hardware when Timer 0 overflows. This flag can be cleared by software but is automatically
cleared when the CPU vectors to the Timer 0 interrupt service routine.
0: No Timer 0 overflow detected.
1: Timer 0 has overflowed.
Bit4:
TR0: Timer 0 Run Control.
0: Timer 0 disabled.
1: Timer 0 enabled.
Bit3:
IE1: External Interrupt 1.
This flag is set by hardware when an edge/level of type defined by IT1 is detected. It can be cleared
by software but is automatically cleared when the CPU vectors to the External Interrupt 1 service
routine if IT1 = 1. When IT1 = 0, this flag is set to `1' when /INT1 is active as defined by bit IN1PL
in register INT01CF (see Figure 8.14).
Bit2:
IT1: Interrupt 1 Type Select.
This bit selects whether the configured /INT1 interrupt will be edge or level sensitive. /INT1 is con-
figured active low or high by the IN1PL bit in the IT01CF register (see Figure 8.14).
0: /INT1 is level triggered.
1: /INT1 is edge triggered.
Bit1:
IE0: External Interrupt 0.
This flag is set by hardware when an edge/level of type defined by IT0 is detected. It can be cleared
by software but is automatically cleared when the CPU vectors to the External Interrupt 0 service
routine if IT0 = 1. When IT0 = 0, this flag is set to `1' when /INT0 is active as defined by bit IN0PL
in register INT01CF (see Figure 8.14).
Bit0:
IT0: Interrupt 0 Type Select.
This bit selects whether the configured /INT0 interrupt will be edge or level sensitive. /INT0 is con-
figured active low or high by the IN0PL bit in register IT01CF (see Figure 8.14).
0: /INT0 is level triggered.
1: /INT0 is edge triggered.
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
TF1
TR1
TF0
TR0
IE1
IT1
IE0
IT0
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address:
(bit addressable)
0x88
Page 138
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
Figure 15.5. TMOD: Timer Mode Register
Bit7:
GATE1: Timer 1 Gate Control.
0: Timer 1 enabled when TR1 = 1 irrespective of /INT1 logic level.
1: Timer 1 enabled only when TR1 = 1 AND /INT1 is active as defined by bit IN1PL in register
INT01CF (see Figure 8.14).
Bit6:
C/T1: Counter/Timer 1 Select.
0: Timer Function: Timer 1 incremented by clock defined by T1M bit (CKCON.4).
1: Counter Function: Timer 1 incremented by high-to-low transitions on external input pin (T1).
Bits5-4:
T1M1-T1M0: Timer 1 Mode Select.
These bits select the Timer 1 operation mode.
Bit3:
GATE0: Timer 0 Gate Control.
0: Timer 0 enabled when TR0 = 1 irrespective of /INT0 logic level.
1: Timer 0 enabled only when TR0 = 1 AND /INT0 is active as defined by bit IN0PL in register
INT01CF (see Figure 8.14).
Bit2:
C/T0: Counter/Timer Select.
0: Timer Function: Timer 0 incremented by clock defined by T0M bit (CKCON.3).
1: Counter Function: Timer 0 incremented by high-to-low transitions on external input pin (T0).
Bits1-0:
T0M1-T0M0: Timer 0 Mode Select.
These bits select the Timer 0 operation mode.
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
GATE1
C/T1
T1M1
T1M0
GATE0
C/T0
T0M1
T0M0
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address:
0x89
T1M1
T1M0
Mode
0
0
Mode 0: 13-bit counter/timer
0
1
Mode 1: 16-bit counter/timer
1
0
Mode 2: 8-bit counter/timer with auto-reload
1
1
Mode 3: Timer 1 inactive
T0M1
T0M0
Mode
0
0
Mode 0: 13-bit counter/timer
0
1
Mode 1: 16-bit counter/timer
1
0
Mode 2: 8-bit counter/timer with auto-reload
1
1
Mode 3: Two 8-bit counter/timers
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 139
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
Figure 15.6. CKCON: Clock Control Register
Bit7:
UNUSED. Read = 0b, Write = don't care.
Bit6:
T2MH: Timer 2 High Byte Clock Select
This bit selects the clock supplied to the Timer 2 high byte if Timer 2 is configured in split 8-bit timer
mode. T2MH is ignored if Timer 2 is in any other mode.
0: Timer 2 high byte uses the clock defined by the T2XCLK bit in TMR2CN.
1: Timer 2 high byte uses the system clock.
Bit5:
T2ML: Timer 2 Low Byte Clock Select
This bit selects the clock supplied to Timer 2. If Timer 2 is configured in split 8-bit timer mode, this
bit selects the clock supplied to the lower 8-bit timer.
0: Timer 2 low byte uses the clock defined by the T2XCLK bit in TMR2CN.
1: Timer 2 low byte uses the system clock.
Bit4:
T1M: Timer 1 Clock Select.
This select the clock source supplied to Timer 1. T1M is ignored when C/T1 is set to logic 1.
0: Timer 1 uses the clock defined by the prescale bits, SCA1-SCA0.
1: Timer 1 uses the system clock.
Bit3:
T0M: Timer 0 Clock Select.
This bit selects the clock source supplied to Timer 0. T0M is ignored when C/T0 is set to logic 1.
0: Counter/Timer 0 uses the clock defined by the prescale bits, SCA1-SCA0.
1: Counter/Timer 0 uses the system clock.
Bit2:
UNUSED. Read = 0b, Write = don't care.
Bits1-0:
SCA1-SCA0: Timer 0/1 Prescale Bits
These bits control the division of the clock supplied to Timer 0 and/or Timer 1 if configured to use
prescaled clock inputs.
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
-
T2MH
T2ML
T1M
T0M
-
SCA1
SCA0
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address:
0x8E
SCA1
SCA0
Prescaled Clock
0
0
System clock divided by 12
0
1
System clock divided by 4
1
0
System clock divided by 48
1
1
External clock divided by 8
Note: External clock divided by 8 is synchronized with the
system clock, and the external clock must be less than or
equal to the system clock to operate in this mode.
Page 140
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
Figure 15.7. TL0: Timer 0 Low Byte
Bits 7-0:
TL0: Timer 0 Low Byte.
The TL0 register is the low byte of the 16-bit Timer 0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address:
0x8A
Figure 15.8. TL1: Timer 1 Low Byte
Bits 7-0:
TL1: Timer 1 Low Byte.
The TL1 register is the low byte of the 16-bit Timer 1.
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address:
0x8B
Figure 15.9. TH0: Timer 0 High Byte
Bits 7-0:
TH0: Timer 0 High Byte.
The TH0 register is the high byte of the 16-bit Timer 0.
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address:
0x8C
Figure 15.10. TH1: Timer 1 High Byte
Bits 7-0:
TH1: Timer 1 High Byte.
The TH1 register is the high byte of the 16-bit Timer 1.
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address:
0x8D
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 141
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
15.2.
Timer 2
Timer 2 is a 16-bit timer formed by two 8-bit SFRs: TMR2L (low byte) and TMR2H (high byte). Timer 2 may oper-
ate in 16-bit auto-reload mode or (split) 8-bit auto-reload mode. The T2SPLIT bit (TMR2CN.3) defines the Timer 2
operation mode.
Timer 2 may be clocked by the system clock, the system clock divided by 12, or the external oscillator source divided
by 8. The external clock mode is ideal for real-time clock (RTC) functionality, where the internal oscillator drives the
system clock while Timer 2 (and/or the PCA) is clocked by an external precison oscillator. Note that the external
oscillator source divided by 8 is synchronized with the system clock.
15.2.1. 16-bit Timer with Auto-Reload
When T2SPLIT (TMR2CN.3) is zero, Timer 2 operates as a 16-bit timer with auto-reload. Timer 2 can be clocked by
SYSCLK, SYSCLK divided by 12, or the external oscillator clock source divided by 8. As the 16-bit timer register
increments and overflows from 0xFFFF to 0x0000, the 16-bit value in the Timer 2 reload registers (TMR2RLH and
TMR2RLL) is loaded into the Timer 2 register as shown in Figure 15.11, and the Timer 2 High Byte Overflow Flag
(TMR2CN.7) is set. If Timer 2 interrupts are enabled (if IE.5 is set), an interrupt will be generated on each Timer 2
overflow. Additionally, if Timer 2 interrupts are enabled and the TF2LEN bit is set (TMR2CN.5), an interrupt will be
generated each time the lower 8 bits (TL2) overflow from 0xFF to 0x00.
Figure 15.11. Timer 2 16-Bit Mode Block Diagram
External Clock / 8
SYSCLK / 12
SYSCLK
TMR2L
TMR2H
TMR2RLL TMR2RLH
Reload
TCLK
0
1
TR2
T
M
R2
CN
T2SPLIT
TF2L
TF2H
T2XCLK
TR2
0
1
T2XCLK
CKCON
T
2
M
H
S
C
A
0
S
C
A
1
T
2
M
L
T
1
M
T
0
M
Interrupt
TF2LEN
To ADC,
SMBus
To SMBus
TMR2L
Overflow
Page 142
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
15.2.2. 8-bit Timers with Auto-Reload
When T2SPLIT is set, Timer 2 operates as two 8-bit timers (TMR2H and TMR2L). Both 8-bit timers operate in auto-
reload mode as shown in Figure 15.12. TMR2RLL holds the reload value for TMR2L; TMR2RLH holds the reload
value for TMR2H. The TR2 bit in TMR2CN handles the run control for TMR2H. TMR2L is always running when
configured for 8-bit Mode.
Each 8-bit timer may be configured to use SYSCLK, SYSCLK divided by 12, or the external oscillator clock source
divided by 8. The Timer 2 Clock Select bits (T2MH and T2ML in CKCON) select either SYSCLK or the clock
defined by the Timer 2 External Clock Select bit (T2XCLK in TMR2CN), as follows:
Note: External clock divided by 8 is synchronized with the system clock, and the external clock must be less than or
equal to the system clock to operate in this mode.
The TF2H bit is set when TMR2H overflows from 0xFF to 0x00; the TF2L bit is set when TMR2L overflows from
0xFF to 0x00. When Timer 2 interrupts are enabled (IE.5), an interrupt is generated each time TMR2H overflows. If
Timer 2 interrupts are enabled and TF2LEN (TMR2CN.5) is set, an interrupt is generated each time either TMR2L or
TMR2H overflows. When TF2LEN is enabled, software must check the TF2H and TF2L flags to determine the
source of the Timer 2 interrupt. The TF2H and TF2L interrupt flags are not cleared by hardware and must be manu-
ally cleared by software.
T2MH
T2XCLK
TH2 Clock Source
T2ML
T2XCLK
TL2 Clock Source
0
0
SYSCLK / 12
0
0
SYSCLK / 12
0
1
External Clock / 8
0
1
External Clock / 8
1
X
SYSCLK
1
X
SYSCLK
Figure 15.12. Timer 2 8-Bit Mode Block Diagram
SYSCLK
TCLK
0
1
TR2
External Clock / 8
SYSCLK / 12
0
1
T2XCLK
1
0
TMR2H
TMR2RLH
Reload
CKCON
T
2
M
H
S
C
A
0
S
C
A
1
T
2
M
L
T
1
M
T
0
M
Reload
TCLK
TMR2L
TMR2RLL
Interrupt
T
M
R2CN
T2SPLIT
TF2LEN
TF2L
TF2H
T2XCLK
TR2
To ADC,
SMBus
To SMBus
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 143
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
Bit7:
TF2H: Timer 2 High Byte Overflow Flag
Set by hardware when the Timer 2 high byte overflows from 0xFF to 0x00. In 16 bit mode, this will
occur when Timer 2 overflows from 0xFFFF to 0x0000. When the Timer 2 interrupt is enabled, set-
ting this bit causes the CPU to vector to the Timer 2 interrupt service routine. TF2H is not automati-
cally cleared by hardware and must be cleared by software.
Bit6:
TF2L: Timer 2 Low Byte Overflow Flag
Set by hardware when the Timer 2 low byte overflows from 0xFF to 0x00. When this bit is set, an
interrupt will be generated if TF2LEN is set and Timer 2 interrupts are enabled. TF2L will set when
the low byte overflows regardless of the Timer 2 mode. This bit is not automatically cleared by hard-
ware.
Bit5:
TF2LEN: Timer 2 Low Byte Interrupt Enable.
This bit enables/disables Timer 2 Low Byte interrupts. If TF2LEN is set and Timer 2 interrupts are
enabled, an interrupt will be generated when the low byte of Timer 2 overflows. This bit should be
cleared when operating Timer 2 in 16-bit mode.
0: Timer 2 Low Byte interrupts disabled.
1: Timer 2 Low Byte interrupts enabled.
Bit4:
UNUSED. Read = 0b. Write = don't care.
Bit3:
T2SPLIT: Timer 2 Split Mode Enable
When this bit is set, Timer 2 operates as two 8-bit timers with auto-reload.
0: Timer 2 operates in 16-bit auto-reload mode.
1: Timer 2 operates as two 8-bit auto-reload timers.
Bit2:
TR2: Timer 2 Run Control.
This bit enables/disables Timer 2. In 8-bit mode, this bit enables/disables TH2 only; TL2 is always
enabled in this mode.
0: Timer 2 disabled.
1: Timer 2 enabled.
Bit1:
UNUSED. Read = 0b. Write = don't care.
Bit0:
T2XCLK: Timer 2 External Clock Select
This bit selects the external clock source for Timer 2. If Timer 2 is in 8-bit mode, this bit selects the
external oscillator clock source for both timer bytes. However, the Timer 2 Clock Select bits (T2MH
and T2ML in register CKCON) may still be used to select between the external clock and the system
clock for either timer.
0: Timer 2 external clock selection is the system clock divided by 12.
1: Timer 2 external clock selection is the external clock divided by 8. Note that the external oscillator
source divided by 8 is synchronized with the system clock.
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
TF2H
TF2L
TF2LEN
-
T2SPLIT
TR2
-
T2XCLK
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address:
(bit addressable)
0xC8
Figure 15.13. TMR2CN: Timer 2 Control Register
Page 144
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
Bits 7-0:
TMR2RLL: Timer 2 Reload Register Low Byte.
TMR2RLL holds the low byte of the reload value for Timer 2.
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address:
0xCA
Figure 15.14. TMR2RLL: Timer 2 Reload Register Low Byte
Figure 15.15. TMR2RLH: Timer 2 Reload Register High Byte
Bits 7-0:
TMR2RLH: Timer 2 Reload Register High Byte.
The TMR2RLH holds the high byte of the reload value for Timer 2.
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address:
0xCB
Figure 15.16. TMR2L: Timer 2 Low Byte
Bits 7-0:
TMR2L: Timer 2 Low Byte.
In 16-bit mode, the TMR2L register contains the low byte of the 16-bit Timer 2. In 8-bit mode,
TMR2L contains the 8-bit low byte timer value.
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address:
0xCC
Figure 15.17. TMR2H Timer 2 High Byte
Bits 7-0:
TMR2H: Timer 2 High Byte.
In 16-bit mode, the TMR2H register contains the high byte of the 16-bit Timer 2. In 8-bit mode,
TMR2H contains the 8-bit high byte timer value.
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address:
0xCD
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 145
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
16.
PROGRAMMABLE COUNTER ARRAY
The Programmable Counter Array (PCA0) provides enhanced timer functionality while requiring less CPU interven-
tion than the standard 8051 counter/timers. The PCA consists of a dedicated 16-bit counter/timer and three 16-bit
capture/compare modules. Each capture/compare module has its own associated I/O line (CEXn) which is routed
through the Crossbar to Port I/O when enabled (See
Section "12.1. Priority Crossbar Decoder" on page 96
for
details on configuring the Crossbar). The counter/timer is driven by a programmable timebase that can select between
six sources: system clock, system clock divided by four, system clock divided by twelve, the external oscillator clock
source divided by 8, Timer 0 overflow, or an external clock signal on the ECI input pin. Each capture/compare mod-
ule may be configured to operate independently in one of six modes: Edge-Triggered Capture, Software Timer, High-
Speed Output, Frequency Output, 8-Bit PWM, or 16-Bit PWM (each mode is described in
Section "16.2. Capture/
Compare Modules" on page 147
). The external oscillator clock option is ideal for real-time clock (RTC) functional-
ity, allowing the PCA to be clocked by a precision external oscillator while the internal oscillator drives the system
clock. The PCA is configured and controlled through the system controller's Special Function Registers. The basic
PCA block diagram is shown in Figure 16.1.
Important Note: The PCA Module 2 may be used as a watchdog timer (WDT), and is enabled in this mode follow-
ing a system reset. Access to certain PCA registers is restricted while WDT mode is enabled. See
Section 16.3
for
details.
16-Bit Counter/Timer
C
EX1
EC
I
Digital Crossbar
CE
X
2
CE
X
0
Port I/O
Capture/Compare
Module 1
Capture/Compare
Module 0
Capture/Compare
Module 2 / WDT
PCA
CLOCK
MUX
SYSCLK/12
SYSCLK/4
Timer 0 Overflow
ECI
SYSCLK
External Clock/8
Figure 16.1. PCA Block Diagram
Page 146
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
16.1.
PCA Counter/Timer
The 16-bit PCA counter/timer consists of two 8-bit SFRs: PCA0L and PCA0H. PCA0H is the high byte (MSB) of the
16-bit counter/timer and PCA0L is the low byte (LSB). Reading PCA0L automatically latches the value of PCA0H
into a "snapshot" register; the following PCA0H read accesses this "snapshot" register. Reading the PCA0L Regis-
ter first guarantees an accurate reading of the entire 16-bit PCA0 counter
. Reading PCA0H or PCA0L does not
disturb the counter operation. The CPS2-CPS0 bits in the PCA0MD register select the timebase for the counter/timer
as shown in Table 16.1. Note that in `External oscillator source divided by 8' mode, the external oscillator
source is synchronized with the system clock, and must have a frequency less than or equal to the system clock.
When the counter/timer overflows from 0xFFFF to 0x0000, the Counter Overflow Flag (CF) in PCA0MD is set to
logic 1 and an interrupt request is generated if CF interrupts are enabled. Setting the ECF bit in PCA0MD to logic 1
enables the CF flag to generate an interrupt request. The CF bit is not automatically cleared by hardware when the
CPU vectors to the interrupt service routine, and must be cleared by software (Note: PCA0 interrupts must be glo-
bally enabled before CF interrupts are recognized. PCA0 interrupts are globally enabled by setting the EA bit and the
EPCA0 bit to logic 1). Clearing the CIDL bit in the PCA0MD register allows the PCA to continue normal operation
while the CPU is in Idle mode.
Table 16.1. PCA Timebase Input Options
CPS2
CPS1
CPS0
Timebase
0
0
0
System clock divided by 12
0
0
1
System clock divided by 4
0
1
0
Timer 0 overflow
0
1
1
High-to-low transitions on ECI (max rate = system clock divided by 4)
1
0
0
System clock
1
0
1
External oscillator source divided by 8
External oscillator source divided by 8 is synchronized with the system clock.
Figure 16.2. PCA Counter/Timer Block Diagram
PCA0CN
C
F
C
R
C
C
F
0
C
C
F
2
C
C
F
1
SYSCLK/12
SYSCLK/4
Timer 0 Overflow
ECI
000
001
010
011
PCA0MD
C
I
D
L
W
D
T
E
E
C
F
C
P
S
1
C
P
S
0
W
D
L
C
K
C
P
S
2
IDLE
0
1
100
101
SYSCLK
External Clock/8
PCA0H
PCA0L
Snapshot
Register
To SFR Bus
Overflow
To PCA Interrupt System
CF
PCA0L
read
To PCA Modules
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 147
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
16.2.
Capture/Compare Modules
Each module can be configured to operate independently in one of six operation modes: Edge-triggered Capture,
Software Timer, High Speed Output, Frequency Output, 8-Bit Pulse Width Modulator, or 16-Bit Pulse Width Modu-
lator. Each module has Special Function Registers (SFRs) associated with it in the CIP-51 system controller. These
registers are used to exchange data with a module and configure the module's mode of operation.
Table 16.2 summarizes the bit settings in the PCA0CPMn registers used to select the PCA capture/compare module's
operating modes. Setting the ECCFn bit in a PCA0CPMn register enables the module's CCFn interrupt. Note: PCA0
interrupts must be globally enabled before individual CCFn interrupts are recognized. PCA0 interrupts are globally
enabled by setting the EA bit and the EPCA0 bit to logic 1. See Figure 16.3 for details on the PCA interrupt configu-
ration.
Table 16.2. PCA0CPM Register Settings for PCA Capture/Compare Modules
PWM16
ECOM
CAPP CAPN
MAT
TOG
PWM
ECCF
Operation Mode
X
X
1
0
0
0
0
X
Capture triggered by positive edge on
CEXn
X
X
0
1
0
0
0
X
Capture triggered by negative edge on
CEXn
X
X
1
1
0
0
0
X
Capture triggered by transition on
CEXn
X
1
0
0
1
0
0
X
Software Timer
X
1
0
0
1
1
0
X
High Speed Output
X
1
0
0
X
1
1
X
Frequency Output
0
1
0
0
X
0
1
X
8-Bit Pulse Width Modulator
1
1
0
0
X
0
1
X
16-Bit Pulse Width Modulator
X = Don't Care
Figure 16.3. PCA Interrupt Block Diagram
PCA0CN
C
F
C
R
C
C
F
0
C
C
F
2
C
C
F
1
PCA0MD
C
I
D
L
W
D
T
E
E
C
F
C
P
S
1
C
P
S
0
W
D
L
C
K
C
P
S
2
0
1
PCA Module 0
(CCF0)
PCA Module 1
(CCF1)
ECCF1
0
1
ECCF0
0
1
PCA Module 2
(CCF2)
ECCF2
PCA Counter/
Timer Overflow
0
1
PCA0CPMn
(for n = 0 to 2)
P
W
M
1
6
n
E
C
O
M
n
E
C
C
F
n
T
O
G
n
P
W
M
n
C
A
P
P
n
C
A
P
N
n
M
A
T
n
Interrupt
Priority
Decoder
EPCA0
0
1
EA
0
1
Page 148
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
16.2.1. Edge-triggered Capture Mode
In this mode, a valid transition on the CEXn pin causes the PCA to capture the value of the PCA counter/timer and
copy it into the corresponding module's 16-bit capture/compare register (PCA0CPLn and PCA0CPHn). The CAPPn
and CAPNn bits in the PCA0CPMn register are used to select the type of transition that triggers the capture: low-to-
high transition (positive edge), high-to-low transition (negative edge), or either transition (positive or negative edge).
When a capture occurs, the Capture/Compare Flag (CCFn) in PCA0CN is set to logic 1 and an interrupt request is
generated if CCF interrupts are enabled. The CCFn bit is not automatically cleared by hardware when the CPU vec-
tors to the interrupt service routine, and must be cleared by software. If both CAPPn and CAPNn bits are set to
logic 1, then the state of the Port pin associated with CEXn can be read directly to determine whether a rising-edge or
falling-edge caused the capture.
Note: The CEXn input signal must remain high or low for at least 2 system clock cycles to be recognized by the hard-
ware.
Figure 16.4. PCA Capture Mode Diagram
PCA0L
PCA0CPLn
PCA
Timebase
CEXn
Crossbar
Port I/O
PCA0H
Capture
PCA0CPHn
0
1
0
1
(t
o
C
CF
n
)
PCA0CPMn
P
W
M
1
6
n
E
C
O
M
n
E
C
C
F
n
T
O
G
n
P
W
M
n
C
A
P
P
n
C
A
P
N
n
M
A
T
n
PCA0CN
C
F
C
R
C
C
F
0
C
C
F
2
C
C
F
1
PCA Interrupt
0
0 0 0 x
x
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 149
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
16.2.2. Software Timer (Compare) Mode
In Software Timer mode, the PCA counter/timer value is compared to the module's 16-bit capture/compare register
(PCA0CPHn and PCA0CPLn). When a match occurs, the Capture/Compare Flag (CCFn) in PCA0CN is set to
logic 1 and an interrupt request is generated if CCF interrupts are enabled. The CCFn bit is not automatically cleared
by hardware when the CPU vectors to the interrupt service routine, and must be cleared by software. Setting the
ECOMn and MATn bits in the PCA0CPMn register enables Software Timer mode.
Important Note About Capture/Compare Registers: When writing a 16-bit value to the PCA0 Capture/Compare
registers, the low byte should always be written first. Writing to PCA0CPLn clears the ECOMn bit to `0'; writing to
PCA0CPHn sets ECOMn to `1'.
Figure 16.5. PCA Software Timer Mode Diagram
Match
16-bit Comparator
PCA0H
PCA0CPHn
Enable
PCA0L
PCA
Timebase
PCA0CPLn
0 0
0 0
0
1
x
ENB
ENB
0
1
Write to
PCA0CPLn
Write to
PCA0CPHn
Reset
PCA0CPMn
P
W
M
1
6
n
E
C
O
M
n
E
C
C
F
n
T
O
G
n
P
W
M
n
C
A
P
P
n
C
A
P
N
n
M
A
T
n
x
PCA0CN
C
F
C
R
C
C
F
0
C
C
F
2
C
C
F
1
PCA Interrupt
Page 150
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
16.2.3. High Speed Output Mode
In High Speed Output mode, a module's associated CEXn pin is toggled each time a match occurs between the PCA
Counter and the module's 16-bit capture/compare register (PCA0CPHn and PCA0CPLn) Setting the TOGn, MATn,
and ECOMn bits in the PCA0CPMn register enables the High-Speed Output mode.
Important Note About Capture/Compare Registers: When writing a 16-bit value to the PCA0 Capture/Compare
registers, the low byte should always be written first. Writing to PCA0CPLn clears the ECOMn bit to `0'; writing to
PCA0CPHn sets ECOMn to `1'.
Figure 16.6. PCA High Speed Output Mode Diagram
Match
16-bit Comparator
PCA0H
PCA0CPHn
Enable
PCA0L
PCA
Timebase
PCA0CPLn
0
1
0 0
0 x
ENB
ENB
0
1
Write to
PCA0CPLn
Write to
PCA0CPHn
Reset
PCA0CPMn
P
W
M
1
6
n
E
C
O
M
n
E
C
C
F
n
T
O
G
n
P
W
M
n
C
A
P
P
n
C
A
P
N
n
M
A
T
n
x
CEXn
Crossbar
Port I/O
Toggle
0
1
TOGn
PCA0CN
C
F
C
R
C
C
F
0
C
C
F
2
C
C
F
1
PCA Interrupt
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 151
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
16.2.4. Frequency Output Mode
Frequency Output Mode produces a programmable-frequency square wave on the module's associated CEXn pin.
The capture/compare module high byte holds the number of PCA clocks to count before the output is toggled. The
frequency of the square wave is then defined by Equation 16.1.
Where F
PCA
is the frequency of the clock selected by the CPS2-0 bits in the PCA mode register, PCA0MD. The
lower byte of the capture/compare module is compared to the PCA counter low byte; on a match, CEXn is toggled
and the offset held in the high byte is added to the matched value in PCA0CPLn. Frequency Output Mode is enabled
by setting the ECOMn, TOGn, and PWMn bits in the PCA0CPMn register.
Equation 16.1. Square Wave Frequency Output
F
CEXn
F
PCA
2
PCA0CPHn
-----------------------------------------
=
8-bit
Comparator
PCA0L
Enable
PCA Timebase
match
PCA0CPHn
8-bit Adder
PCA0CPLn
Adder
Enable
CEXn
Crossbar
Port I/O
Toggle
0
1
TOGn
0 0 0
x
PCA0CPMn
P
W
M
1
6
n
E
C
O
M
n
E
C
C
F
n
T
O
G
n
P
W
M
n
C
A
P
P
n
C
A
P
N
n
M
A
T
n
x
ENB
ENB
0
1
Write to
PCA0CPLn
Write to
PCA0CPHn
Reset
Figure 16.7. PCA Frequency Output Mode
Page 152
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
16.2.5. 8-Bit Pulse Width Modulator Mode
Each module can be used independently to generate a pulse width modulated (PWM) output on its associated CEXn
pin. The frequency of the output is dependent on the timebase for the PCA counter/timer. The duty cycle of the PWM
output signal is varied using the module's PCA0CPLn capture/compare register. When the value in the low byte of the
PCA counter/timer (PCA0L) is equal to the value in PCA0CPLn, the output on the CEXn pin will be set to `1'. When
the count value in PCA0L overflows, the CEXn output will be set to `0' (see Figure 16.8). Also, when the counter/
timer low byte (PCA0L) overflows from 0xFF to 0x00, PCA0CPLn is reloaded automatically with the value stored in
the module's capture/compare high byte (PCA0CPHn) without software intervention. Setting the ECOMn and
PWMn bits in the PCA0CPMn register enables 8-Bit Pulse Width Modulator mode. The duty cycle for 8-Bit PWM
Mode is given by Equation 16.2.
Important Note About Capture/Compare Registers: When writing a 16-bit value to the PCA0 Capture/Compare
registers, the low byte should always be written first. Writing to PCA0CPLn clears the ECOMn bit to `0'; writing to
PCA0CPHn sets ECOMn to `1'.
Using Equation 16.2, the largest duty cycle is 100% (PCA0CPHn = 0), and the smallest duty cycle is 0.39%
(PCA0CPHn = 0xFF). A 0% duty cycle may be generated by clearing the ECOMn bit to `0'.
DutyCycle
256
PCA0CPHn
(
)
256
---------------------------------------------------
=
Equation 16.2. 8-Bit PWM Duty Cycle
8-bit
Comparator
PCA0L
PCA0CPLn
PCA0CPHn
CEXn
Crossbar
Port I/O
Enable
Overflow
PCA Timebase
0 0 x 0
x
Q
Q
SET
CLR
S
R
match
PCA0CPMn
P
W
M
1
6
n
E
C
O
M
n
E
C
C
F
n
T
O
G
n
P
W
M
n
C
A
P
P
n
C
A
P
N
n
M
A
T
n
0
ENB
ENB
0
1
Write to
PCA0CPLn
Write to
PCA0CPHn
Reset
Figure 16.8. PCA 8-Bit PWM Mode Diagram
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 153
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
16.2.6. 16-Bit Pulse Width Modulator Mode
A PCA module may also be operated in 16-Bit PWM mode. In this mode, the 16-bit capture/compare module defines
the number of PCA clocks for the low time of the PWM signal. When the PCA counter matches the module contents,
the output on CEXn is set to `1'; when the counter overflows, CEXn is set to `0'. To output a varying duty cycle, new
value writes should be synchronized with PCA CCFn match interrupts. 16-Bit PWM Mode is enabled by setting the
ECOMn, PWMn, and PWM16n bits in the PCA0CPMn register. For a varying duty cycle, match interrupts should be
enabled (ECCFn = 1 AND MATn = 1) to help synchronize the capture/compare register writes. The duty cycle for 16-
Bit PWM Mode is given by Equation 16.3.
Important Note About Capture/Compare Registers: When writing a 16-bit value to the PCA0 Capture/Compare
registers, the low byte should always be written first. Writing to PCA0CPLn clears the ECOMn bit to `0'; writing to
PCA0CPHn sets ECOMn to `1'.
Using Equation 16.3, the largest duty cycle is 100% (PCA0CPn = 0), and the smallest duty cycle is 0.0015%
(PCA0CPn = 0xFFFF). A 0% duty cycle may be generated by clearing the ECOMn bit to `0'.
Equation 16.3. 16-Bit PWM Duty Cycle
DutyCycle
65536
PCA0CPn
(
)
65536
-----------------------------------------------------
=
Figure 16.9. PCA 16-Bit PWM Mode
PCA0CPLn
PCA0CPHn
Enable
PCA Timebase
0 0 x 0
x
PCA0CPMn
P
W
M
1
6
n
E
C
O
M
n
E
C
C
F
n
T
O
G
n
P
W
M
n
C
A
P
P
n
C
A
P
N
n
M
A
T
n
1
16-bit Comparator
CEXn
Crossbar
Port I/O
Overflow
Q
Q
SET
CLR
S
R
match
PCA0H
PCA0L
ENB
ENB
0
1
Write to
PCA0CPLn
Write to
PCA0CPHn
Reset
Page 154
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
16.3.
Watchdog Timer Mode
A programmable watchdog timer (WDT) function is available through the PCA Module 2. The WDT is used to gen-
erate a reset if the time between writes to the WDT update register (PCA0CPH2) exceed a specified limit. The WDT
can be configured and enabled/disabled as needed by software.
With the WDTE bit set in the PCA0MD register, Module 2 operates as a watchdog timer (WDT). The Module 2 high
byte is compared to the PCA counter high byte; the Module 2 low byte holds the offset to be used when WDT updates
are performed. The Watchdog Timer is enabled on reset. Writes to some PCA registers are restricted while the
Watchdog Timer is enabled.
16.3.1. Watchdog Timer Operation
While the WDT is enabled:
PCA counter is forced on.
Writes to PCA0L and PCA0H are not allowed.
PCA clock source bits (CPS2-CPS0) are frozen.
PCA Idle control bit (CIDL) is frozen.
Module 2 is forced into software timer mode.
Writes to the module 2 mode register (PCA0CPM2) are disabled.
While the WDT is enabled, writes to the CR bit will not change the PCA counter state; the counter will run until the
WDT is disabled. The PCA counter run control (CR) will read zero if the WDT is enabled but user software has not
enabled the PCA counter. If a match occurs between PCA0CPH2 and PCA0H while the WDT is enabled, a reset will
be generated. To prevent a WDT reset, the WDT may be updated with a write of any value to PCA0CPH2. Upon a
PCA0CPH2 write, PCA0H plus the offset held in PCA0CPL2 is loaded into PCA0CPH2 (See Figure 16.10).
Figure 16.10. PCA Module 2 with Watchdog Timer Enabled
PCA0H
Enable
PCA0L Overflow
Reset
PCA0CPL2
8-bit Adder
PCA0CPH2
Adder
Enable
PCA0MD
C
I
D
L
W
D
T
E
E
C
F
C
P
S
1
C
P
S
0
W
D
L
C
K
C
P
S
2
Match
Write to
PCA0CPH2
8-bit
Comparator
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 155
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
Note that the 8-bit offset held in PCA0CPH2 is compared to the upper byte of the 16-bit PCA counter. This offset
value is the number of PCA0L overflows before a reset. Up to 256 PCA clocks may pass before the first PCA0L
overflow occurs, depending on the value of the PCA0L when the update is performed. The total offset is then given
(in PCA clocks) by Equation 16.4, where PCA0L is the value of the PCA0L register at the time of the update.
The WDT reset is generated when PCA0L overflows while there is a match between PCA0CPH2 and PCA0H. Soft-
ware may force a WDT reset by writing a `1' to the CCF2 flag (PCA0CN.2) while the WDT is enabled.
16.3.2. Watchdog Timer Usage
To configure the WDT, perform the following tasks:
Disable the WDT by writing a `0' to the WDTE bit.
Select the desired PCA clock source (with the CPS2-CPS0 bits).
Load PCA0CPL2 with the desired WDT update offset value.
Configure the PCA Idle mode (set CIDL if the WDT should be suspended while the CPU is in Idle mode).
Enable the WDT by setting the WDTE bit to `1'.
The PCA clock source and Idle mode select cannot be changed while the WDT is enabled. The Watchdog Timer is
enabled by setting the WDTE or WDLCK bits in the PCA0MD register. When WDLCK is set, the WDT cannot be
disabled until the next system reset. If WDLCK is not set, the WDT is disabled by clearing the WDTE bit.
The WDT is enabled following any reset. The PCA0 counter clock defaults to the system clock divided by 12,
PCA0L defaults to 0x00, and PCA0CPL2 defaults to 0x00. Using Equation 16.4, this results in a WDT timeout inter-
val of 3072 system clock cycles. Table 16.3 lists some example timeout intervals for typical system clocks, assuming
SYSCLK / 12 as the PCA clock source.
Table 16.3. Watchdog Timer Timeout Intervals
System Clock (Hz)
PCA0CPL2
Timeout Interval (ms)
24,500,000
255
32.1
24,500,000
128
16.2
24,500,000
32
4.1
18,432,000
255
42.7
18,432,000
128
21.5
18,432,000
32
5.5
11,059,200
255
71.1
11,059,200
128
35.8
11,059,200
32
9.2
3,060,000
255
257
3,060,000
128
129.5
3,060,000
32
33.1
32,000
255
24576
32,000
128
12384
32,000
32
3168
Assumes SYSCLK / 12 as the PCA clock source, and a PCA0L value of 0x00 at the update
time.
Internal oscillator reset frequency.
Equation 16.4. Watchdog Timer Offset in PCA Clocks
Offset
256
PCA0CPL2
(
)
256
PCA0L
(
)
+
=
Page 156
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
16.4.
Register Descriptions for PCA
Following are detailed descriptions of the special function registers related to the operation of the PCA.
Bit7:
CF: PCA Counter/Timer Overflow Flag.
Set by hardware when the PCA Counter/Timer overflows from 0xFFFF to 0x0000. When the
Counter/Timer Overflow (CF) interrupt is enabled, setting this bit causes the CPU to vector to the
PCA interrupt service routine. This bit is not automatically cleared by hardware and must be cleared
by software.
Bit6:
CR: PCA Counter/Timer Run Control.
This bit enables/disables the PCA Counter/Timer.
0: PCA Counter/Timer disabled.
1: PCA Counter/Timer enabled.
Bits5-3:
UNUSED. Read = 000b, Write = don't care.
Bit2:
CCF2: PCA Module 2 Capture/Compare Flag.
This bit is set by hardware when a match or capture occurs. When the CCF2 interrupt is enabled, set-
ting this bit causes the CPU to vector to the PCA interrupt service routine. This bit is not automati-
cally cleared by hardware and must be cleared by software.
Bit1:
CCF1: PCA Module 1 Capture/Compare Flag.
This bit is set by hardware when a match or capture occurs. When the CCF1 interrupt is enabled, set-
ting this bit causes the CPU to vector to the PCA interrupt service routine. This bit is not automati-
cally cleared by hardware and must be cleared by software.
Bit0:
CCF0: PCA Module 0 Capture/Compare Flag.
This bit is set by hardware when a match or capture occurs. When the CCF0 interrupt is enabled, set-
ting this bit causes the CPU to vector to the PCA interrupt service routine. This bit is not automati-
cally cleared by hardware and must be cleared by software.
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
CF
CR
-
-
-
CCF2
CCF1
CCF0
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address:
(bit addressable)
0xD8
Figure 16.11. PCA0CN: PCA Control Register
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 157
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
Figure 16.12. PCA0MD: PCA Mode Register
Bit7:
CIDL: PCA Counter/Timer Idle Control.
Specifies PCA behavior when CPU is in Idle Mode.
0: PCA continues to function normally while the system controller is in Idle Mode.
1: PCA operation is suspended while the system controller is in Idle Mode.
Bit6:
WDTE: Watchdog Timer Enable
If this bit is set, PCA Module 2 is used as the Watchdog Timer.
0: Watchdog Timer disabled.
1: PCA Module 2 enabled as Watchdog Timer.
Bit5:
WDLCK: Watchdog Timer Lock
This bit locks/unlocks the Watchdog Timer Enable. When WDLCK is set, the Watchdog Timer may
not be disabled until the next system reset.
0: Watchdog Timer Enable unlocked.
1: Watchdog Timer Enable locked.
Bit4:
UNUSED. Read = 0b, Write = don't care.
Bits3-1:
CPS2-CPS0: PCA Counter/Timer Pulse Select.
These bits select the clock source for the PCA counter
Bit0:
ECF: PCA Counter/Timer Overflow Interrupt Enable.
This bit sets the masking of the PCA Counter/Timer Overflow (CF) interrupt.
0: Disable the CF interrupt.
1: Enable a PCA Counter/Timer Overflow interrupt when CF (PCA0CN.7) is set.
Note: When the WDTE bit is set to `1', the PCA0MD register cannot be modified. To change the contents
of the PCA0MD register, the Watchdog Timer must first be disabled.
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
CIDL
WDTE
WDLCK
-
CPS2
CPS1
CPS0
ECF
01000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address:
0xD9
CPS2
CPS1
CPS0
Timebase
0
0
0
System clock divided by 12
0
0
1
System clock divided by 4
0
1
0
Timer 0 overflow
0
1
1
High-to-low transitions on ECI (max rate = system clock divided
by 4)
1
0
0
System clock
1
0
1
External clock divided by 8
1
1
0
Reserved
1
1
1
Reserved
External oscillator source divided by 8 is synchronized with the system clock.
Page 158
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
PCA0CPMn Address:
PCA0CPM0 = 0xDA (n = 0)
PCA0CPM1 = 0xDB (n = 1)
PCA0CPM2 = 0xDC (n = 2)
Bit7:
PWM16n: 16-bit Pulse Width Modulation Enable.
This bit selects 16-bit mode when Pulse Width Modulation mode is enabled (PWMn = 1).
0: 8-bit PWM selected.
1: 16-bit PWM selected.
Bit6:
ECOMn: Comparator Function Enable.
This bit enables/disables the comparator function for PCA Module n.
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
Bit5:
CAPPn: Capture Positive Function Enable.
This bit enables/disables the positive edge capture for PCA Module n.
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
Bit4:
CAPNn: Capture Negative Function Enable.
This bit enables/disables the negative edge capture for PCA Module n.
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
Bit3:
MATn: Match Function Enable.
This bit enables/disables the match function for PCA Module n. When enabled, matches of the PCA
counter with a module's capture/compare register cause the CCFn bit in PCA0MD register to be set to
logic 1.
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
Bit2:
TOGn: Toggle Function Enable.
This bit enables/disables the toggle function for PCA Module n. When enabled, matches of the PCA
counter with a module's capture/compare register cause the logic level on the CEXn pin to toggle. If
the PWMn bit is also set to logic 1, the module operates in Frequency Output Mode.
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
Bit1:
PWMn: Pulse Width Modulation Mode Enable.
This bit enables/disables the PWM function for PCA Module n. When enabled, a pulse width modu-
lated signal is output on the CEXn pin. 8-bit PWM is used if PWM16n is cleared; 16-bit mode is used
if PWM16n is set to logic 1. If the TOGn bit is also set, the module operates in Frequency Output
Mode.
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
Bit0:
ECCFn: Capture/Compare Flag Interrupt Enable.
This bit sets the masking of the Capture/Compare Flag (CCFn) interrupt.
0: Disable CCFn interrupts.
1: Enable a Capture/Compare Flag interrupt request when CCFn is set.
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
PWM16n
ECOMn
CAPPn
CAPNn
MATn
TOGn
PWMn
ECCFn
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address:
0xDA, 0xDB,
0xDC
Figure 16.13. PCA0CPMn: PCA Capture/Compare Mode Registers
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 159
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
Bits 7-0:
PCA0L: PCA Counter/Timer Low Byte.
The PCA0L register holds the low byte (LSB) of the 16-bit PCA Counter/Timer.
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address:
0xF9
Figure 16.14. PCA0L: PCA Counter/Timer Low Byte
Bits 7-0:
PCA0H: PCA Counter/Timer High Byte.
The PCA0H register holds the high byte (MSB) of the 16-bit PCA Counter/Timer.
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address:
0xFA
Figure 16.15. PCA0H: PCA Counter/Timer High Byte
Page 160
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
Figure 16.16. PCA0CPLn: PCA Capture Module Low Byte
PCA0CPLn Address:
PCA0CPL0 = 0xFB (n = 0)
PCA0CPL1 = 0xE9 (n = 1)
PCA0CPL2 = 0xEB (n = 2)
Bits7-0:
PCA0CPLn: PCA Capture Module Low Byte.
The PCA0CPLn register holds the low byte (LSB) of the 16-bit capture Module n.
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address:
0xFB, 0xE9,
0xEB
PCA0CPHn Address:
PCA0CPH0 = 0xFC (n = 0)
PCA0CPH1 = 0xEA (n = 1)
PCA0CPH2 = 0xEC(n = 2)
Bits7-0:
PCA0CPHn: PCA Capture Module High Byte.
The PCA0CPHn register holds the high byte (MSB) of the 16-bit capture Module n.
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
SFR Address:
0xFC, 0xEA,
0xEC
Figure 16.17. PCA0CPHn: PCA Capture Module High Byte
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 161
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
17.
C2 INTERFACE
C8051F300/1/2/3/4/5 devices include an on-chip Cygnal 2-Wire (C2) debug interface to allow FLASH programming,
boundary scan functions, and in-system debugging with the production part installed in the end application. The C2
interface operates similar to JTAG, where the three JTAG data signals (TDI, TDO, TMS) are mapped into one bi-
directional C2 data signal (C2D). See the C2 Interface Specification for details on the C2 protocol.
17.1.
C2 Interface Registers
The following describes the C2 registers necessary to perform FLASH programming and boundary scan functions
through the C2 interface. All C2 registers are accessed through the C2 interface as described in the C2 Interface Spec-
ification.
Figure 17.1. C2ADD: C2 Address Register
Bits7-0:
The C2ADD register is accessed via the C2 interface to select the target Data register for C2 Data
Read and Data Write commands.
Reset Value
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Address
Description
0x00
Selects the Device ID register for Data Read instructions
0x01
Selects the Revision ID register for Data Read instructions
0x02
Selects the C2 FLASH Programming Control register for Data
Read/Write instructions
0xB4
Selects the C2 FLASH Programming Data register for Data Read/Write
instructions
0x80
Selects the Port0 register for Data Read/Write instructions
0xF1
Selects the Port0 Input Mode register for Data Read/Write instructions
0xA4
Selects the Port0 Output Mode register for Data Read/Write instructions
Figure 17.2. DEVICEID: C2 Device ID Register
This read-only register returns the 8-bit device ID: 0x04 (C8051F300/1/2/3).
Reset Value
00000100
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Page 162
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
Figure 17.3. REVID: C2 Revision ID Register
This read-only register returns the 8-bit revision ID: 0x00 (Revision A)
Reset Value
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Figure 17.4. FPCTL: C2 FLASH Programming Control Register
Bits7-0
FPCTL: FLASH Programming Control Register
This register is used to enable FLASH programming via the C2 interface. To enable C2 FLASH
programming, the following codes must be written in order: 0x02, 0x01. Note that once C2 FLASH
programming is enabled, a system reset must be issued to resume normal operation.
Reset Value
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Figure 17.5. FPDAT: C2 FLASH Programming Data Register
Bits7-0:
FPDAT: C2 FLASH Programming Data Register
This register is used to pass FLASH commands, addresses, and data during C2 FLASH accesses.
Valid commands are listed below.
Reset Value
00000000
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Code
Command
0x06
FLASH Block Read
0x07
FLASH Block Write
0x08
FLASH Page Erase
0x03
Device Erase
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
DS004-2.2 APR 03
Page 163
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
17.2.
C2 Pin Sharing
The C2 protocol allows the C2 pins to be shared with user functions so that in-system debugging, FLASH program-
ming, and boundary scan functions may be performed. This is possible because C2 communication is typically per-
formed when the device is in the halt state, where all on-chip peripherals and user software are stalled. In this halted
state, the C2 interface can safely `borrow' the C2CK (normally /RST) and C2D (normally P0.7) pins. In most appli-
cations, external resistors are required to isolate C2 interface traffic from the user application. A typical isolation con-
figuration is shown in Figure 17.6.
The configuration in Figure 17.6 assumes the following:
1.
The user input (b) cannot change state while the target device is halted.
2.
The /RST pin on the target device is used as an input only.
Additional resistors may be necessary depending on the specific application.
C2D (P0.7)
C2CK (/RST)
/Reset (a)
Input (b)
Output (c)
C8051F300
Figure 17.6. Typical C2 Pin Sharing
Page 164
DS004-2.2 APR 03
2003 Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
PRELIMINARY
C8051F300/1/2/3
C8051F304/5
Disclaimers
Life support: These products are not designed for use in life support appliances or systems where malfunction of
these products can reasonably be expected to result in personal injury. Cygnal Integrated Products customers using or
selling these products for use in such applications do so at their own risk and agree to fully indemnify Cygnal Inte-
grated Products for any damages resulting from such applications.
Right to make changes: Cygnal Integrated Products reserves the right to make changes, without notice, in the prod-
ucts, including circuits and/or software, described or contained herein in order to improve design and/or performance.
Cygnal Integrated Products assumes no responsibility or liability for the use of any of these products, conveys no
license or title under any patent, copyright, or mask work right to these products, and makes no representations or
warranties that these products are free from patent, copyright, or mask work infringement, unless otherwise specified.
CIP-51 is a trademark of Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.
MCS-51 and SMBus are trademarks of Intel Corporation.
I
2
C is a trademark of Philips Semiconductor.
CYGNAL INTEGRATED PRODUCTS
4301 Westbank Drive
Suite B-100
Austin, TX 78746
www.cygnal.com